JP7459914B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding slot machines, when the start lever is operated while medals are being bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is carried out, the reels begin to rotate, and the reels stop while they are rotating. When the switch is operated, the reels stop rotating. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the internal lottery result, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention relates to
A plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of patterns applied thereto in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated;
A stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A means for executing a specific determination that allows a specific event advantageous to a player to occur when a determination trigger occurs;
a means for enabling the specific event to occur when a result of the specific determination is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event;
a determination means capable of executing a predetermined calculation process on the specific numerical information when the result of the determination is not the specific result;
A means for changing the likelihood of the specific event occurring when the specific numerical information becomes special numerical information;
a means for executing a first calculation process on the specific numerical information when the game in which the predetermined judgment trigger occurs is a first game, and executing a second calculation process different from the first calculation process on the specific numerical information when the game in which the predetermined judgment trigger occurs is a second game different from the first game, or not executing the calculation process when the game in which the predetermined judgment trigger occurs is the second game;
Equipped with
The device is configured so that a player can understand that the specific judgment is being made ,
a first result which allows a prize to be won when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, and a second result which allows a prize to be won when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode are set as lottery results by the lottery means;
a means for executing notification of an operation mode of the stop operation means,
A specific state in which the mode notification can be executed is provided as a gaming state,
A means for starting the specific state when a start condition is satisfied;
means for terminating the specific state when a termination condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The predetermined determination trigger occurs in the specific state,
When the end condition is met, the specific state can be ended without initializing the specific numerical information .

The present invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front door. FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device; 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main controller. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows lottery processing. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state when three bets are made; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state when two bets are made; 13 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing. It is a figure showing an example of a lottery table for bonus states. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between states. It is a flowchart which shows lottery result corresponding processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the lottery process for transition to advantageous zones. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of various transition lottery tables. It is a flowchart which shows AT addition processing. A figure showing an example of an add-on lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows rotation production processing. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an overview of an indication monitor and a section display. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the push order notification presentation performed on the auxiliary display unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process. It is a flow chart which shows section display first processing. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd process. It is a flowchart which shows lottery opportunity determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process by the display control apparatus of the sub side. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for notifying an AT lottery mode. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of a full stop. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery trigger notification process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special notification process. It is a figure showing an example of a special information lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display performance and reel performance by an auxiliary display part. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the lottery trigger for the AT mode transition lottery and the transition of the lottery mode. It is a flowchart which shows the notification 1st process for BB. 13 is a flowchart showing a second BB notification process. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. 11 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the lottery trigger for the AT mode transition lottery and the transition of the lottery mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the lottery trigger of the AT mode transition lottery and the transition to the lottery mode. In Modification 1, (a) is a flowchart showing processing for an advantageous section transition game, and (b) is a flowchart showing processing for table notification. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode transition table. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. In variant example 2, (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the benefit granted, (b) is a diagram showing a portion of the lottery table for BB state, (c1) is a flowchart showing a portion of the lottery result response processing, and (c2) is a flowchart showing a portion of the winning result response processing. It is a flowchart which shows bonus state processing. (a) is a flowchart showing the trigger adjustment process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a part of the AT lottery mode notification process. In Modification 3, (a) is a flowchart showing processing for an advantageous section transition game, and (b) is a flowchart showing lottery opportunity determination processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a special notification process in the fourth modified example. It is a figure showing an example of a special information lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for notifying an AT lottery mode. It is a flowchart which shows reel control processing in a 2nd embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a random number acquisition process. 11 is a diagram for explaining an overview of a lottery information storage area. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows lottery result corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows random number shift processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd process. 13A is a flowchart showing processing for a favorable zone transition game, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing lottery trigger determination processing. FIG. 13 illustrates an example of a mode transition table. It is a figure which shows an example of AT mode transition lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all stops are performed. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for displaying a hold. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an overview of a hold display. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a hold shift. A diagram for explaining an overview of the hold display. A diagram for explaining an overview of the hold display. (a) is a flowchart showing AT lottery mode notification processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing notification restriction processing. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery trigger notification process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special notification process. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a second mode notification lottery table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a prediction notification lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure for explaining the relationship between a lottery mode and an AT counter. 13 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the lottery mode and the AT counter. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. A figure showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table in variant example 1. In variant example 2, (a) is a flowchart showing the process for obtaining random numbers, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the transition of lottery modes in various situations and whether or not various processes for random numbers are executed.

First Embodiment
An embodiment of the present invention, which is applied to a reel type gaming machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of a slot machine 10, Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 closed, Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 open, Fig. 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and Fig. 5 is a front view of a cabinet 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed into a box shape with an open front as a whole, and is attached to so-called island equipment by nailing or the like when installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a, 14b at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a, 13b. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 is supported rotatably around an opening and closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b with respect to the housing 11, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. The front door 12 is locked and cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on its back side. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game status. Three vertically elongated display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into two parts, an upper part and a lower part, by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 is provided with a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical (annular) shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is supported so that it can rotate with its central axis being the axis of rotation of the reel. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one to each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly explained.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be rotated individually, i.e., independently, by driving each stepping motor. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving a drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as excitation pulse) of, for example, 500 pulses, and this excitation pulse controls the rotational position of the stepping motor, i.e., the rotational position of the reel. In addition, reel index sensors for detecting one rotation of the reel are installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the reel unit 31. When the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, it outputs a detection signal to the main control device 101 described later. Therefore, the main control device 101 can check and correct the angular position of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input.

On the outer periphery of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, multiple symbols are drawn in the long side direction (rotation direction) as identification information. More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, to switch from one symbol to the next symbol at a specified position, it is necessary to output 25 excitation pulses (= 500 pulses ÷ 20 symbols). Furthermore, the main control device 101 can determine which symbols are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R and stop a specified symbol at a position visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be explained.

FIG. 6 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, numbers 0 to 19 are assigned corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main controller 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. This is a number for recognition, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, in the following explanation, the numbers will be used.

There are ten types of symbols: "bell" symbol (e.g., the first on the left reel 32L), "replay" symbol (e.g., the zeroth on the left reel 32L), "red 7" symbol (e.g., the fourteenth on the left reel 32L), "watermelon" symbol (e.g., the second on the left reel 32L), "cherry" symbol (e.g., the eighth on the left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., the ninth on the left reel 32L), "white 7" symbol (e.g., the third on the left reel 32L), "young man" symbol (e.g., the eighteenth on the left reel 32L), "red shell" symbol (e.g., the fourth on the left reel 32L), and "white shell" symbol (e.g., the nineteenth on the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols are completely different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that out of 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel, only 3 symbols can be visually recognized in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game results of each game are announced using a total of three combinations of symbols, one symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the symbols that can be seen. As described above, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible, and as combinations of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, there are combinations of symbols that stop on the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, combinations of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and combinations of symbols that stop on the lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a downward-right line L4 that connects the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and combinations of symbols that stop on an upward-right line L5 that connects the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a curved line L6 that connects the middle pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are lined up, and the curved line L6 is a line that bends when the symbols are lined up. There are other combinations of symbols that stop on lines that bend, other than the curved line L6, but we will not explain them here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, lines that are activated and lines that are not activated by medal bets are set, and when symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the activated line, When winning a prize, a bonus is given in which a predetermined number of medals as game media are paid out, or a bonus is given in which the game state is changed. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on a line that is not activated, no prize is won and the above benefits are not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, among the above lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as the active line. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, there are cases where the game is started by betting three medals and cases where the game is started by betting two medals. When the game is started by betting three or two medals, only the bent line L6 is set as the active line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as active lines. In the following description, the bent line L6 may be referred to as the active line ML. In addition, hereinafter, a game that is started by betting three medals is also referred to as a three-bet game, a game that is started by betting two medals is also referred to as a two-bet game, and a game that is started by betting one medal is also referred to as a one-bet game. In this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set.

Figures 8 to 10 show the correspondence between winning combinations of symbols and the benefits that will be awarded if a winning combination is achieved.

The small prize winnings that result in medal payouts include the 1st small prize winning to the 32nd small prize winning.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the first small winning combination is won. When the first small winning combination is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the symbol corresponding to the first minor win stops on the pay line ML, the "bell" symbols stop in a line sloping to the right L4. This allows the player to easily understand that a minor win corresponding to a bell has been achieved.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, a second small prize is awarded. When the second small winning combination is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbols corresponding to the second small winning combination stop on the active line ML, the "bell" symbols all stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor prize winning corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the player can win a minor prize that is different from the first minor prize winning described above. It is also understandable that the following holds true.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" or "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, the third minor win is achieved. When the third minor win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the symbol corresponding to the third small win stops on the pay line ML, the "bell" symbols stop in a line on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to a bell has been achieved, and also understand that a small win different from the first and second small wins has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbols are aligned.

When the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, a fourth small prize is awarded. When the fourth small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(d), when the symbol corresponding to the 4th minor win stops on the pay line ML, the "bell" symbols stop in a line slanting to the right L5. This allows the player to easily understand that a minor win corresponding to a bell has been achieved, and also allows the player to understand that a minor win different from the 1st to 3rd minor wins has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbols are aligned.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, the 5th minor win is achieved. When the 5th minor win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(e), when the symbol corresponding to the 5th minor win stops on the pay line ML, the "bell" symbols stop in a line on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor win corresponding to a bell has been achieved, and can also understand that a minor win different from the 1st to 4th minor wins has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbols are aligned.

When the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the sixth small prize is won. When the sixth small winning combination is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(f), when the symbol corresponding to the 6th small winning combination stops on the active line ML, the "bell" symbol appears in the lower row of the left reel 32L, the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the lower row of the right reel 32R. stops (stops in a hill shape). Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small prize winning corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and from the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbol, the player can easily understand that the above-mentioned 1st minor prize winning to 5th minor prize winning is achieved. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize is established, which is different from the above.

The “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol, “cherry” symbol, “red shell” symbol, or “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “white 7” symbol, “white shell” on the right reel 32R If the symbol or the "youth" symbol stops on the active line ML, the seventh small winning combination will be won. When the seventh small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the symbol corresponding to the seventh minor win stops on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop in a line sloping to the right L4. This allows the player to easily understand that a minor win corresponding to the watermelon has been achieved.

When the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 8th small prize is won. When the 8th small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the symbols corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination stop on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbols all stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small prize winning corresponding to the watermelon has been achieved, and due to the difference in the line in which the "watermelon" symbol is aligned, a small prize winning that is different from the above-mentioned 7th minor prize winning It is also understandable that the following holds true.

The 9th to 32nd minor prizes are so-called missed prizes, which are awarded when the 1st to 6th minor prizes are missed. When the 9th to 32nd minor prizes are awarded, one medal is paid out in a 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in a 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd minor winning symbols are awarded when the corresponding combination of the "replay", "red 7", "BAR", "red shell", "white shell", "young man" or "bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "white 7", "cherry", "red shell", "young man" or "red 7", "watermelon", "replay", "BAR", "bell" or "white shell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7", "white 7", "white shell", "young man" or "watermelon", "red shell", "BAR" or "replay" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. As shown in Figures 8 and 9, the symbol combinations corresponding to the 9th to 32nd minor wins are all set so that the "bell" symbols do not all stop on a straight line (L1 to L5), making it easy to understand that the minor win corresponding to the bell has not been achieved.

Incidentally, in the configuration where medals are paid out based on the above-mentioned 1st to 32nd minor wins, the paid out minor wins are a type of bonus given according to the outcome of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as "out balls," and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (out balls) to the number of medals inserted (bet) may also be referred to as "out ball rate."

The winning combinations that grant the replay privilege, which allows the player to play the next game without inserting a medal, are the 1st replay winning combination to the 12th replay winning combination. As shown in FIG. 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the 1st replay to the 12th replay.

A first replay win is achieved when the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "Red 7", "White 7", "White Shell" or "Youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(c), when the symbol corresponding to the first replay win stops on the pay line ML, the "Replay" symbols stop in line on the center line L2. This allows the player to easily understand that a replay win corresponding to a replay has been achieved.

The second replay wins when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" or "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. When the symbols corresponding to the second replay win stop on the active line ML, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the "BAR" symbols stop lined up on the upward-right line L5, or as shown in FIG. 14(b), the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol stop on the upward-right line L5 in order from left to right. When the second replay wins, the player may be awarded a special benefit.

In the third replay, the "bell" symbol, "red shell" symbol, or "youth" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the active line ML. If it stops at the top, a prize is awarded. When the symbols corresponding to the 3rd re-game winning stop on the active line ML, the "white 7" symbols are aligned and stop on the lower line L3, as shown in FIG. 14(c), or as shown in FIG. 14(d). As shown, the "Red 7" symbols line up and stop on the downward-sloping line L4. When the third re-game winning is achieved, benefits advantageous to the player may be awarded.

The fourth and fifth replays are adjustment replays in case multiple replays result in overlapping wins.

The 6th replay consists of a "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, a "Red 7" symbol, a "White 7" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, and a "Cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R. A winning is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "youth" symbol, stops on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(d), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth re-game winning stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel 32L and the upper row of the middle reel 32M, while the The "Watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "Watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel 32R), resulting in a so-called upper stage watermelon tenpai-off state. Also, when the symbol corresponding to the 6th re-game winning stops on the active line ML, the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel 32L and the lower row of the right reel 32R, while the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the middle row of the middle reel 32M. ” The symbol does not stop (the “Watermelon” symbol stops at the top of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a so-called right-down-down-watermelon-off state.

In the seventh replay, a win is achieved when the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or the "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(e), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay win stop on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the top row of the left reel 32L and the top row of the right reel 32R, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the top row of the middle reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle row of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a stop pattern that is so-called "upper row watermelon tenpai miss." In addition, when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay win stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top of the left reel 32L and the middle of the middle reel 32M, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the bottom of the right reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top of the right reel 32R), resulting in a so-called right-downward watermelon tenpai miss.

The 8th replay consists of a "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "white 7" symbol, a "cherry" symbol, an "aka shell" symbol, or a "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. A winning is established when and stops on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 8th re-game winning stop on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbols all stop on the middle line L2.

In the 9th replay, when the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol or "Ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. A prize will be awarded. As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the symbol corresponding to the 9th replay win stops on the active line ML, the "replay" symbol stops on the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, while the right The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), resulting in a so-called middle stage replay out-of-temperature stopping mode.

In the tenth replay, a win is achieved when the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "red shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "white shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. In the twelfth replay, a win is achieved when the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 13(c) and FIG. 13(d), when a symbol corresponding to the 10th replay or 12th replay win stops on the pay line ML, a "cherry" symbol stops on the lower row of the left reel 32L. If the 10th replay or 12th replay is won, and a stop operation is performed aiming for the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol stops on the upper row in the case of the 10th replay win, and the "cherry" symbol stops on the middle or lower row in the case of the 12th replay win, so it is possible to distinguish between the 10th replay win and the 12th replay win. The 11th replay wins when the 10th replay or 12th replay cannot be won, i.e., when there is a possibility of a miss.

State transition winnings, which only result in a transition of the game state, include the 1st BB winning and the 2nd BB winning.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the first BB prize is won. When the first BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 13(e), when the symbols corresponding to the first BB winning are stopped on the active line ML, the "white 7" symbols are all stopped on the middle line L2.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, a second BB win is achieved. When a second BB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 13(f), when the symbols corresponding to a second BB win stop on the pay line ML, the "white 7" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol stops in the middle row of the right reel 32R.

At the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 is provided which is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, that is, start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are connected to a main control device 101, which will be described later. The main controller 101 then recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated based on detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a output LOW detection signals, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 recognizes the switching of the signals and recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls the reels corresponding to the operated switches to stop rotating.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped. In this case, the right reel 32R stops rotating. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal insertion slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. In addition, considering that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the action of the player directly inserting medals, it can also be said to constitute a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal insertion port 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46, which serves as a passage switching means provided on the back of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 stored inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to a medal tray 50 from a medal discharge port 49 provided on the lower front surface of the front door 12, and are returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out the medals to the player. The dispensing device 53 discharges the medals into an opening 48a provided in the discharging passage 48 by rotating a medal dispensing rotating plate (not shown), and dispensing the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 via the discharging passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a reserve tank 54 is provided to avoid storing more than a predetermined amount of medals in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals are stored at a level higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals stuck in the selector 46 are removed. It is designed to be returned through a discharge port 49.

A first credit insertion switch 56 is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual medals as game media at one time out of the specified number of the game. The specific number is set according to the progress of the game. For example, when the specified number of the game is set to 3 and the specific number is set to 3, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 3 virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits, when the specified number is set to 2 and the specific number is set to 2, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 2 virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits, when the specified number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 3, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 3 virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits, when the specified number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 2, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 2 virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits. In addition, a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. The credit insertion switches 56, 57, together with the medal insertion slot 45, constitute an input means for inputting game media. Also, while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the action of the player directly inserting a medal, the credit insertion switches 56, 57 only involve the action of inserting a virtual medal based on the stored memory. Considering this, they can also be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media. Note that in this slot machine 10, a credit insertion switch is not provided because one virtual medal is inserted.

The first credit insertion switch 56 is set to have a larger operating surface for operation by the player than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. Therefore, it is expected that normally the player will operate the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, normally the player will insert a specific number of coins out of the specified number to play the game.

To the right of the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57, a performance switch 66 is provided which is operated when a performance occurs.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores as virtual medals any surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) or medals paid out when a prize is won, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, when focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, the settlement switch 59 can also be said to constitute a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, a remaining payout number display section 61 that displays the number of medals remaining to be paid out until the BB state ends, and a payout number display section 62 that displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs. These display sections 60 to 62 are made up of seven-segment displays, but can of course be replaced with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25, and to the right of the payout number display section 62, there is a push order display that indicates the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a push order display that indicates the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. An instruction monitor 68 is provided which has a section indicator for indicating an advantageous section, which is a section in which the winning rate of the small winning combination is changed by the above, and the game can be played in an advantageous situation for the player. The instruction monitor 68 will be explained in detail later.

At the top of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that play various sound effects and notify the player of the game status as the game progresses. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for providing various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be based on the main display section, in this embodiment, It is called an auxiliary display section 65. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 is provided on the back side of the auxiliary display section 65.

On the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is a lower display section 69 on which the model name of the gaming machine is written and which constitutes a specified display screen. The lower display section 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display section, or the lower display section 69 may be provided with operation buttons for presentation purposes, or the entire lower display section 69 may be configured to be operable.

Inside the housing 11, a power supply box 70 is provided to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside and is equipped with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is an activation switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. The setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hall manager or the like to adjust the medal output. In other words, the hall manager or the like can insert the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turn it ON to set the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting an error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls the game is attached to the cabinet 11.

The main control device 101 is provided with a hand ratio monitor 77 for indicating the ratio between advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player. The hand ratio monitor 77 is installed on the side of the main control device 101 facing the front of the gaming machine so that it is visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is in an open state, and is not visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is in a closed state. More specifically, it is housed in a board box so that the display surface of the hand ratio monitor 77 is visible through the board box in which the main control device 101 is housed. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in a closed state, the hand ratio monitor 77 is not visible through the gaps of the display windows 26L to 26R, and the hand ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21 and the front door 12 is in an open state. The hand ratio monitor 77 will be described in detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams in Figures 15 and 16.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a settlement switch 59. A settlement detection sensor 59a detects the operation of the reset switch 72, a reset detection sensor 72a detects the operation of the reset switch 72, a setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON, etc. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via an input/output port 104.

The power supply unit 91 is connected to the input side of the main control unit 101 via the input/output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to the main control unit 101 and each electronic device of the slot machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the state of power interruption and generates a power failure signal not only in the event of a power outage but also in the event of power interruption by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, which in this example is 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to, for example, less than 10 volts. It is configured so that a power outage signal is output. The power outage signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 executes power outage processing to be described later by recognizing this power outage signal. Further, this power outage signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts to be used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control unit 101, even if the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to allow the main control unit 101 to perform power outage processing.

The output side of the main control device 101 is connected via an input/output port 104 to the reel unit 31 (more specifically, the stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided on the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit display unit 60, the remaining number of coins to be paid out display unit 61, the number of coins to be paid out display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the role ratio monitor 77, the display control device 81, and an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), etc.

The above-mentioned CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, a RAM 106 that secures a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105, and various counters, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, and other processing circuits required for the slot machine 10, as well known in the art (not shown). The ROM 105 and RAM 106 form a main memory as a storage means, and the programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-mentioned ROM 105 as part of the control programs.

RAM 106 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from power supply device 91 even after power to slot machine 10 is cut off. RAM 106 is provided with a backup area in addition to memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the results of a winning combination lottery, a stop information storage area 106b for storing stop information used when controlling the stop of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a status information storage area 106c for storing game status such as BB status.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power cutoff (including power cutoff due to operation of the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter) when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Yes, when the power outage is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is turned off by power outage processing (see FIG. 17), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed during the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing as power outage flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. It has built-in RAM 183 for securing the memory.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), with the main control device 101 connected to the input side and the upper lamps 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 connected to the output side. The display control device 81 drives and controls the upper lamps 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 based on various commands input from the main control device 101. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that manages the overall game. In other words, by providing a sub-board for sounds, lamps, and displays indirectly related to the game, the burden on the main board is reduced.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected to the effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66) and the like. Note that the display control device 81 may also be configured to drive and control the various display units 60 to 62, 68.

Next, the control processes executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processes of the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into main processes that are started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processes that are started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Below, we will explain the processes related to the progress of the game among these processes, i.e., timer interrupt processes, and normal processes performed in the main processes.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main controller 101, and the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 that are used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to a backup area in the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here is an overview of how power outages are handled.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power outage signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes an NMI interrupt process and sets a power outage flag in a power outage flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure process, first, it is determined whether the transmission of the command has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process, and the transmission of the command is terminated. If the transmission of the command has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a RAM judgment value for judging whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power failure is resolved is calculated and saved in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent access to the RAM. After the above process is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and processing being unable to be executed. Note that, in consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise, for example, the power failure signal is checked to see if it is being output before entering the infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not being output, it means that the power failure state has been recovered, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power failure signal continues to be output, the infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, even in an infinite loop, it checks whether the power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, it transitions to the main process.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are carried out.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clear process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed to enable the CPU 102 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S106, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the stepping motors that are the reel drive motors for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate. In step S107, a sensor monitoring process is performed to read the status of various sensors such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 (see FIG. 15), and to monitor whether the read results are normal or not. In step S108, a timer update process is performed to subtract and add the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to transmit various commands such as a lottery result command to be described later to the display control device 81. In step S111, segment data setting processing is performed to set segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, remaining payout number display section 61, payout number display section 62, and instruction monitor 68, respectively. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed in which the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. are displayed. In step S113, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are restored to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processing is ended.

Next, the normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 18.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 and the like complete initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game, etc.) are cleared. Thereafter, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any replay winning was achieved in the previous game. If any replay winning was achieved, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals in the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is terminated. Specifically, for example, if a replay winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, a process to automatically insert 3 virtual medals is performed, and if a replay winning is achieved in a 2-bet game, a process to automatically insert 2 virtual medals is performed.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. In other words, if any replay winning was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting medals. If no replay winning was achieved, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether there is an abnormality in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process. If an abnormality is detected, an abnormality occurrence process is performed to put the slot machine 10 into an error state and notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the sensor reading result is normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process is performed to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals have been inserted or the credit insertion switch 56, 57 has been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, and if either has been performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process ends. Also, if neither medals have been inserted nor the credit insertion switch 56, 57 has been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process ends as is.

After the start waiting process ends, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of medals bet has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the prescribed number of coins in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the prescribed number of coins in gaming states other than the bonus state. In other words, in the bonus state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and in other than the bonus state, the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3". An affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been bet, or if a bet has been made but the number of bets is "1", a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to step S204 to wait for the start, and among the processes, the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including information on the number of bets that was determined to be positive in step S205 is set as an output target to the display control device 81, which serves as a sub-control device, in step S206. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that receives the bet command executes processing for notifications based on betting operations (for example, notifications that a game start condition has been met, or notifications of lottery results from a previous game), and controls the speaker 64 and auxiliary display unit 65.

After executing the process in step S206, it is determined in step S207 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under a situation where a specified number of medals have been bet. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S208, a valid line setting process is performed in which the combination line corresponding to the bet number is set as the valid line. That is, only the bending line L6 is set as a valid line. In step S209, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a de-energized state to prohibit bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process in step S210, the reel control process in step S211, and the medal payout process in step S212 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S210 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when determining the validity of a winning combination is acquired. This slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. With this configuration, it becomes possible to obtain a random number promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it becomes possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table is selected for determining the validity of the winning combination. In this slot machine 10, the gaming states are roughly divided into a normal gaming state and a bonus state, and the lottery table is set for each gaming state. In the normal gaming state, the prescribed number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above, so the lottery table for the normal gaming state is the same as the lottery table for the 3-bet game. A lottery table for a 2-bet game is also set up.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the gaming state flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is determined. Select. For example, if the number of bets is "3" and no bonus state flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the current gaming state is determined to be the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is Select a lottery table. If the current game is a 3-bet game, select the normal game state lottery table for 3-bet games (Figure 20), and if the current game is a 2-bet game, select the 2-bet game. Select the normal game state lottery table (FIG. 21). In addition, in this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set which winning probability is based on which internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here we provide additional information about the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process that is started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on with the setting key detection sensor 73a detecting that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on. It is activated after the initialization process of the RAM 106. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated, the setting value is changed from "setting 1" to "setting 2". The setting values are updated as follows: → "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Note that each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated every time the set value is updated. Then, the operation of the start lever 41 with the setting key detection sensor 73a turned OFF is regarded as a setting value confirmation operation, and the setting value at that point is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process ends. do. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display on the credit display section 60 also ends. The setting value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a process of selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored setting values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for the normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 3-bet game. FIG. 21 is a lottery table for the normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 2-bet game. The lottery table has index values IV set, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and has a point value PV set.

After selecting the lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, the determination value DV used for determining the validity of the winning combination is set. In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In addition, in the first judgment value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV, 1, and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value, and a new value is set. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is valid or not. In determining the validity of the combination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65,535, in step S306, a process is executed to set the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 to the winning flag storage area 106a. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the seventh minor winning combination winning flag and the eighth minor winning winning flag are set in step S306. Further, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S306, and if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, in step S306 Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB was won (first BB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB was winning (second BB winning flag), the winning flag is stored in the winning flag storage area 106a. The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set ends (see S203 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset with one of the conditions being that the corresponding winning has been achieved. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over multiple games.

Note that in step S306 in a state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag has been carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1st BB or 2nd BB has been won, the corresponding winning flag is set, If the winning flag is not set, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, when the first BB winning flag is carried over and the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25, the first BB winning flag is not set. In addition, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the index value IV = 11, the judgment value DV exceeds 65535, the 1st minor winning flag, the 9th minor winning flag, the 10th minor winning flag, The winning combination flag and the 13th minor winning flag are set.

In addition, a lottery table in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over is prepared separately, and when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery process is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. It is also possible to have a configuration that performs the following. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so as not to win the first BB and the second BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV has failed. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the validity of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV used to judge the validity of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, the winning combination is determined based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when determining the validity of the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of winning is approximately 1 in 27.3 for setting 1, approximately 1 in 27.5 for setting 3, and approximately 1 in 28.3 for setting 6. It is set so that the higher the price, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both independent of the setting value. It is approximately 1/26.2. The probability of winning on chance A (probability of winning when IV = 4) is approximately 1/164 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning on chance B (probability of winning when IV = 5) is approximately 1/164, regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning is approximately 1/262 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning on chance C (probability of winning when IV = 6) is approximately 16400 minutes regardless of the setting value. 1, and it is set so that chance B is more likely to win than chance C, and chance A is easier to win than chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV=7) is approximately 1/107 for setting 1, approximately 1/104 for setting 3, and approximately 93.6 for setting 6. It is set so that the higher the set value is, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (probability of winning when IV = 8) is approximately 1/215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 9) is approximately 1/215. The probability of winning) is approximately 1/13100 regardless of the setting value, and it is set so that Cherry B is more likely to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. . The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is approximately 1/504 regardless of the setting value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle order push bell 1, middle order push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning Pincer Bell 2, Reverse Push Bell 1, and Reverse Push Bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is the set value. It is approximately 1/18.4 regardless of the difference. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is approximately 1/107 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning the 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is approximately 1/5.03 regardless of the setting value, and other winnings (replay, small winnings, IV = 1 ~ 24) is set higher than the winning probability. In the 3-bet game, it is set so that the duplicate 1-card hand (IV=24) and the 2nd BB (IV=26) cannot be won (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In a 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the first BB is 0. In a situation where the first BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is approximately 1/5.03 (for the first BB), regardless of the setting value. By the way, in a 3-bet game, excluding the increase in the first BB state, a decrease of about 1.77 medals can be expected per game (net increase of medals minus about 1.77 medals).

On the other hand, when determining the validity of the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. , Chance A, Chance B, Chance C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 1 to 9) are as follows when playing the above 3 bet game. The probability is the same as the probability if The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is approximately 1/9.64 regardless of the setting value, making it easier to win than when playing a 3-bet game. It is set to be. The push order bells (IV=11 to 22) are set so that they cannot be won in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is approximately 1 in 257 regardless of the setting value, and is set so that it is more difficult to win than when playing a 3-bet game. has been done. In the 2-bet game, settings are made so that a duplicate 1-card hand (IV=24) can be won, and the probability is approximately 1/1.81 regardless of the setting value. In addition, in the 2-bet game, it is set so that the first BB (IV = 25) cannot be won, but it is set so that it is possible to win the second BB (IV = 26), and the probability of winning is regardless of the setting value. It is approximately 1/4.95. Even in the 2-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the second BB is 0. In a situation where the second BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is approximately 1/4.95 (for the second BB), regardless of the setting value. By the way, in a 2-bet game, excluding the increase in the second BB, a decrease of about 0.64 medals can be expected per game (net increase of medals minus about 0.64 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or if it is determined in step S308 that there are no targets to be judged, this means that the judgment of the winning or losing role has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, where a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a specified period of time.

In the following step S310, lottery result handling processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for determining whether to shift the gaming state or not depending on the lottery results in steps S301 to S308, processing for notifying the winning combination, etc. are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the result of the winning/losing role determination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no command is sent to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed to set symbols that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, when the push order bell 1 is won (won when IV=11) and the first small role winning flag, the ninth small role winning flag, the tenth small role winning flag, and the thirteenth small role winning flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the first small role, the ninth small role, the tenth small role, and the thirteenth small role winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, when the watermelon is won (won when IV=23) and the seventh small role winning flag and the eighth small role winning flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the seventh small role winning and the eighth small role winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the first BB is set so that a winning can be achieved only in a 3-bet game, and the second BB is set so that a winning can be achieved only in a 2-bet game. Therefore, even if the 1st BB winning flag is set, if the game is started as a 2-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information for establishing the 1st BB winning is set. is not performed (stop symbol information is set to avoid the first BB winning). In addition, even if the 2nd BB winning flag is set, if the game is started as a 3 bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 2nd BB winning is set. is not performed (stop symbol information is set to avoid the second BB winning).

In the following step S313, if multiple stoppable symbol information is set in step S312, a priority setting process is executed to set the priority order. For example, if multiple roles out of the small role, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. If a small role and a bonus are won, the priority order is set so that the small role win takes priority, and if a small role win cannot be won, a bonus win takes priority. If a replay and a bonus are won, the priority order is set so that the replay win takes priority.

For example, in a situation where you have won the 1st BB (the 1st BB winning flag is set and the 1st BB winning has been carried over), you also win a watermelon, and the 1st BB prize, the 7th minor prize, and If the stop symbol information corresponding to the 8th minor role winning is set, the priority order is set so that the 7th minor role winning and the 8th minor role winning are established with priority over the 1st BB winning. . In addition, in a situation where you have won the 2nd BB (a situation where the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning has been carried over), you can also win the regular reply A, win the 2nd BB, and win the 1st replay. , if the stop symbol information corresponding to the 2nd re-gaming, 3rd re-gaming, and 4th re-gaming winnings is set, each re-gaming winning is given priority over the 2nd BB winning. Set the ranking.

Here, when a re-game is won, a winning combination of symbols is set so that one of the winning re-games will definitely win. In other words, if the player wins in the replay, the replay win will definitely be achieved and there will be no loss of winnings. Therefore, when stop symbol information for re-games and bonuses is set, a re-game win is always achieved in any of the set re-games, and a bonus win is never achieved.

After executing the process of step S313, the section display first process is executed in step S314, and then the lottery process is ended. The first section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the hand ratio monitor 77, and this process will be explained in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 22.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect process is based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309, the result of the lottery result corresponding process performed in step S310, etc., to perform a performance using reel control during the invalid period. It is processing. The rotation effect processing will be explained in detail later. In the following step S402, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if it has not elapsed, the wait time has elapsed. Wait until If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and motor control initialization processing is performed to set rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106. By performing such processing, acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not start rotating immediately. Thereafter, the process waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a predetermined rotational speed, and the rotation start process ends. Furthermore, when the rotational speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42 to 44. Notify players, etc.

Following the spin start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, where it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been generated. If a stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403, where it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. If a stop command has been generated, a stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to know which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop command. If a stop command command has been set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a corresponding stopping mode in which when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stopping mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding one symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding two symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Thereafter, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol. If they are equal, reel stop processing to stop the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

The second stop information setting process is a process for changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that has been set and the stop outcome of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, when a win occurs when IV=11 to 22, that is, when the push order bell is won (see Figures 20 and 21), the second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning mode that is established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. For example, if the middle order push bell 1 is won, each of the stop switches 42 to 44 will change from left to middle to right, left to right to middle, middle to right to left, right to left to middle, or right to right. The stop information is set so that when the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, the 17th minor role winning, the 18th minor role winning, or the 21st minor role winning is established, and the operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right. In this case, the stop information is set so that the third small winning combination is achieved. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding winning may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The arrangement of symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Therefore, when symbols of the same kind are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R with an interval of four symbols or less, when a winning symbol is formed, the winning symbol can be stopped on an active line regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switch 43. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so that a section is formed with five symbols or more apart, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 while aiming at the symbol in order to stop it on an active line.

An example will be explained in which the middle order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right. In such a case, as described above, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is controlled to stop in order to achieve the 17th small role win, the 18th small role win, or the 21st minor role win.

The 17th small role symbols on the left reel 32L are the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. Furthermore, the 18th small role symbols on the left reel 32L are a "red shell" symbol and a "white shell" symbol. The 21st small role symbols on the left reel 32L are a "replay" symbol and a "youth" symbol. These 17th minor role symbols, 18th minor role symbols, and 21st minor role symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the spacing between the symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, regardless of the timing of the operation, either the 17th small role symbol, the 18th minor role symbol, or the 21st minor role symbol is placed on the active line (middle row). Stop. In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing when they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop the symbol with a small number of sliding pieces on the active line. That is, for example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the fourth "Akakai" symbol (2 It is possible to stop the 21st small role symbol, the 5th “Replay” symbol (3-frame Berries), in the middle row, and the 4th “Akakai” symbol, which has the least number of sliding frames, is placed in the middle row. Stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so that the left reel 32L stops. In this case, although there remains a possibility that the 18th minor role win will be achieved, the 17th minor role win and the 21st minor role win will not be achieved.

When the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th minor winning symbol can be achieved.

The 18th small role symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "Replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "Replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M.

The 18th small role symbols on the right reel 32R are the "white shellfish" symbol and the "youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th small role symbol "Shirakai" symbol or "Young man" symbol can be stopped in the upper row, and cases where it cannot be stopped in the upper row. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when it can be stopped in the upper row, the 18th small winning combination will be won, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when it cannot be stopped in the upper row, a so-called loss will occur. becomes.

Here, when the "Ark Shell" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol stops in the upper row of the middle reel 32M, it means that you win the middle order push bell 1 as described above and the 18th small In addition to cases where there is a possibility of winning a winning combination, there are also cases where there is a possibility of winning the middle order push bell 2 and winning the 20th small winning combination. That is, the 20th small role symbol in the middle order push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M common to the 18th small role symbol. In the right reel 32R, the 18th small role symbol is a "white shell" symbol and a "youth" symbol, while the 20th minor symbol is a "red 7" symbol and a "white 7" symbol, which are different. ing. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th small role symbol and the 20th small role symbol can be changed to the 20th minor role symbol by operating the right stop switch 44 at a timing that can stop the 18th minor role symbol on the active line. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the 20th small role symbol cannot be stopped on the active line and the 20th small role symbol can be stopped on the active line, the 18th small role symbol cannot be stopped on the active line. Each of these designs is arranged on the . Therefore, assuming that you do not know whether you have won the middle order push bell 1 or the middle order push bell 2, you can stop the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M and win the 18th small prize. Even if the 20th minor winning combination is in a stopped state where there is a possibility of winning, it is not possible to aim for it and win the prize.

Next, an example will be explained in which the middle order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle → left → right. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the third small winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "Replay" symbols, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged such that the interval between "Replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "replay" symbol is stopped in the upper row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, "Bell" symbols, which are the third small winning symbols, are arranged such that the interval between "Bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" symbol stops at the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "red shell" symbol, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged such that the interval between these symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated thirdly, the "watermelon" symbol or the "red shell" symbol stops at the upper stage regardless of the timing of the operation. As shown above, if the middle order push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 is operated in the order, the 3rd small prize will be won regardless of the timing of the operation. do.

As mentioned above, if the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operation, the first minor prize will be won regardless of the operation timing. If the 2nd minor role winning, the 3rd minor role winning, the 4th minor role winning, the 5th minor role winning, or the 6th minor role winning is established and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, then Depending on the operation timing, other small winning combinations will be won, or none of the small winning combinations will be achieved and the winnings will be missed. By the way, if you win a common bell, you will win the 1st minor role, the 2nd minor role, the 3rd minor role, the 4th minor role, and the 5th minor role, regardless of the operation order and timing. , or the 6th small role prize is established.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process that sets the number of medals to be paid out, with one condition being that the winning symbol combinations are lined up on the active line. In the payout determination process, the combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped at the bottom of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning has been achieved on the active line. judge. If the winning combination is established, it is further determined whether the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a bonus status process is executed in step S414. The bonus state processing will be explained in detail later. After executing the bonus status process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S415. In the winning result corresponding process, processing for shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result corresponding process will be explained in detail later.

After the winning result processing is performed, the second section display processing is executed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to the display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this processing will be explained in detail later. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 knows the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control processing is terminated.

Next, an outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be explained.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0 or not. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a small winning combination has not been achieved. In such a case, it is determined whether any of the first to twelfth re-game wins has been achieved based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If any re-play winnings have not been achieved, the medal payout process is immediately terminated, and if any re-play winnings have been achieved, a re-play setting process is performed to set the gaming mode to re-play mode. , ends the medal payout process. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) explained earlier, when it is determined that the current gaming mode is the re-gaming mode, automatic input processing is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts are paid out, and the medal payout process is ended. Specifically, regarding the payout of medals, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is It is displayed on the credit display section 60. In addition, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. The medals are paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 via the outlet 49. In addition, in the medal payout process, processing is also performed to change the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals. In addition, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61 is subtracted. .

Next, the bonus state processing in step S414 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether the current game state is a bonus state, i.e., whether the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state can be determined by the presence or absence of a first BB state flag or a second BB state flag that are set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 when transitioning to the first BB state or the second BB state. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the current state is not the first BB state or the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, it is determined whether the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and whether either of the BBs has been won. If neither of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing ends. If either of the BB winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process is performed in which 3 is input to the MAX bet counter provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The MAX bet counter is used to set a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation in which 3 has been input to the MAX bet counter, 3 virtual medals are inserted. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the specified number of medals for the game, in a situation in which the specified number of medals for the game is set to 2 or 3, it is permitted to play a 2-bet game by operating the second credit insertion switch 57. Note that if 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is activated.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether a first BB win or a second BB win has occurred. If neither of the BB wins has occurred, the bonus state processing ends. If either of the BB wins has occurred, the process proceeds to step S505, where it is determined whether a first BB win has occurred.

If the first BB win has been achieved, in step S506, a process of inputting "90" to the BB counter provided in the various counter area 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for determining the upper limit payout number in each BB state. That is, by inputting "90" to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end by the payout of 90 or more medals. In step S507, the first BB win flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, a positive judgment will be made in step S501 from the next game onwards. In the following step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for making the display control device 81 know that the first BB state is starting, and the display control device 81 that receives the first BB start command controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that a first BB start effect corresponding to the start of the first BB state is performed. In addition, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 can know that the first BB state will start from the next game, and controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that an effect for the first BB state is performed from the next game.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, a process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. The prescribed number of bets corresponds to the prescribed number of coins for the above game. That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

The initial values of the specified number of bets are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is started.

In step S505, it is determined that the first BB winning has not been achieved when the second BB winning has been achieved. In this case, the process proceeds to step S511, and a process of inputting "90" to the BB counter is executed. That is, the second BB state is set to end when 90 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, a process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, a process of setting the second BB state flag is executed. After that, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the second BB state is starting. In the display control device 81 that has received the second BB start command, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that a second BB start performance corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that a performance for the second BB state is performed. The first BB start effect and the second BB start effect differ in appearance and content to a degree that is recognizable to the player. The first BB state effect and the second BB state effect also differ in appearance and content to a degree that is recognizable to the player. The processing on the display control device 81 side when the first BB start command or the second BB start command is received will be described in detail later.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, a process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. That is, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is played in a 3-bet game.

If the result of the positive judgment in step S501 is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S515, and processing during the first BB state or the second BB state is performed. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for the BB state. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state, but separate lottery tables may be provided for each state, and the types of roles that can be won and the winning probability of each role may be different. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, it is set so that normal lip A, common bell, and overlapping 1-piece role can be won. The probability of winning normal lip A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1 in 61.2, the probability of winning common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1 in 5.96, and the probability of winning overlapping 1-piece role (probability of winning when IV = 24) is about 1 in 1.31. Additionally, in the first BB state or the second BB state, the probability of a losing result in which no winning combination is achieved is approximately 1 in 10.14. In this case, an increase of approximately 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase in medals plus or minus approximately 0.00 medals), and no increase or decrease in medals occurs in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, although an increase in medals cannot be expected in the first BB state or the second BB state, it is possible to progress through the game without losing medals.

Here, in the normal game state in a 3-bet game and the first BB state to which a 3-bet game can be entered, the main increase in medals is caused by the first to sixth minor winnings, which all result in a payout of 13 medals, and these winnings are the push order bell in the normal game state and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor winnings, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a fixed order in the normal game state, there is a 1 in 9.19 probability of winning, whereas in the first BB state there is a 1 in 5.96 probability of winning, and in a 3-bet game, the first BB state is set to be more likely to win than the normal game state. Also, in the normal game state in a two-bet game and in the second BB state to which a two-bet game can be entered, the main medal increase is the common bell, and while in the normal game state there is a probability of about 1 in 9.64 to win, in the second BB state there is a probability of about 1 in 5.96 to win, so even in a two-bet game, it is set up so that it is easier to win in the second BB state than in the normal game state.

However, as mentioned above, in the first BB state and the second BB state, a lottery table is used in which medals may decrease in each game, so even if the first BB state or the second BB state is completed, an increase in the number of medals held cannot be expected. Conversely, it is expected that the number of medals held will decrease as the first BB state or the second BB state is completed.

In the bonus state processing, in step S515, it is determined whether or not any small winning combination has been achieved in the current game as a result of the lottery processing using the BB state lottery table described above and the control of each reel. If no winning combination has been achieved, the bonus state processing ends as is. If a winning combination has been achieved, in step S516, the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination is subtracted from the BB counter in the various counter area 106e described above. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction processing in step S516. For example, if a common bell is won and the first to sixth small winning combinations are achieved, a payout of 13 coins will be generated, so in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is determined in step S517 that the number is not 0 or less, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number is 0 or less, in step S518, a process is performed to clear the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state. That is, if it is the first BB state, the first BB state flag is cleared, and if it is the second BB state, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, in step S519, a process is executed to input 2 to the MAX bet counter, and in step S520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to be ended this time is set as an output target to the display control device 81. More specifically, if the first BB state is to be ended, the first BB end command is set to be output, and if the second BB state is to be ended, the second BB end command is set to be output. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65 so that a performance for the first BB end or a performance for the second BB end is performed. The processing performed by the display control device 81 when the first BB end command or the second BB end command is received will be explained in detail later.

Thereafter, in step S521, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3, and then the present bonus state processing is ended. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal gaming state after the first BB state or the second BB state ends. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit input switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are input, and the 2-bet game The game will be held at In other words, in a situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the setting is such that the 2-bet game is likely to be played. By the way, after the first BB state or the second BB state ends, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, so you cannot bet 3 coins by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57. In order to play a bet game, it is necessary to insert three medals from the medal slot 45.

Here, the gameplay using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game in the slot machine 10 will be briefly explained with reference to FIG. 26.

The normal gaming state in which the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set and neither BB is winning is a so-called non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, if 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, it becomes a 2 bet game.

In the non-internal state, in a 3-bet game, the first BB can be won but the second BB cannot be won, and in a 2-bet game, the second BB can be won but the first BB cannot be won. In a game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, the second BB can basically be won in a 2-bet game.

If the first BB or second BB is won but no prize is awarded in that winning game, the internal state is one in which the first BB or second BB win is carried over (carry-over state). As described above, even in this internal state, the specified bet number (specified number of coins per game) is set to two or three coins, and two-bet games and three-bet games are possible. However, if the MAX bet counter is set to three as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start play, the game will be a three-bet game.

As already explained, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state where the first BB is won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the first BB winning can be achieved in the 3-bet game, but the first BB winning cannot be achieved in the 2-bet game. Also, in the internal state where the second BB is won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the second BB winning cannot be achieved in the 3-bet game, but the second BB winning can be achieved in the 2-bet game. In other words, if the first BB is won in the 3-bet game, the first BB winning can be achieved by continuing the 3-bet game, but if the first BB is won and the game is switched to the 2-bet game, the first BB winning cannot be achieved. Also, if the second BB is won in the 2-bet game, the second BB winning can be achieved by continuing the 2-bet game, but if the second BB is won and the game is switched to the 3-bet game, the second BB winning cannot be achieved. Furthermore, the first BB and the second BB cannot be won twice, and the first BB cannot be won again when the first BB win is carried over, and the second BB cannot be won twice. Furthermore, the second BB cannot be won again when the second BB win is carried over, and the first BB cannot be won twice. In other words, if the first BB is won and a two-bet game is played, the game will continue in an internal state in which the first BB win is carried over, and if the second BB is won and a three-bet game is played, the game will continue in an internal state in which the second BB win is carried over.

Here, as mentioned above, since the 1st BB winning is made to occur only in 3-bet games, and the 2nd BB winning is made to be made only in 2-bet games, the 3rd BB winning in a situation where the 2nd BB winning is carried over Even if you end up with a losing result in which you do not win any role in a bet game, the 2nd BB won will not be established, and if you end up losing in a 2 bet game where the 1st BB winning is carried over. Even if it is, the 1st BB prize will not be established. By doing this, it becomes possible to dramatically simplify the winning structure and the control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the internal state where the first BB winning and the second BB winning are carried over. If the configuration is such that a 2nd BB win can be achieved in a 3-bet game, or a 1st BB win can be achieved in a 2-bet game, the internal state that carries over the 1st BB win or 2nd BB win If you want to continue winning, it will be necessary to create a lottery table that will not result in a losing result, and for example, in a winning combination that may be missed, it will be necessary to win another winning combination when the winning result is missed.

Furthermore, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the main winning combination that increases medals is the common bell. In addition, in the non-internal state and internal state, the main role that increases medals in a 2-bet game is the common bell, whereas the main role that increases medals in a 3-bet game is the push order bell. . Regarding the common bell, any one of the 1st to 6th minor winning combinations will be won regardless of the operating order and timing of each stop switch 42 to 44, whereas the pressing order bell , the winning small winning combinations differ depending on the operating order and operating timing of each stop switch 42 to 44. In other words, the amplitude of medal increase/decrease due to the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the push order bell is won is greater in the non-internal state and internal state in a 3-bet game than in the 1st BB state and 2nd BB state. is big. Then, for example, when the push order bell is won, the AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) assists in winning by notifying the operation order (Fig. 25) from the 1st minor prize winning to the 6th minor prize winning. By switching between the non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) and the non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is also possible to create a state in which the number of medals increases and a state in which the number of medals decreases depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

The basic flow of the game when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated is that first, in the non-internal state, a 2-bet game is played, and the 2nd BB is won in the 2-bet game. When the 2nd BB is won, the game switches to the internal state, and the game proceeds in a state in which the 2nd BB winning cannot be realized. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the 1st BB is not won, and the 2nd BB is not won, and the game continues in the internal state in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over.

The following will assume that the game is played with the second BB win carried over, and will explain the gameplay that utilizes notifications (push order notifications) when the push order bell is won during that game (also referred to as normal game in the following explanation).

<Lottery result processing>
First, the lottery result response process performed in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 27. The lottery result response process is a process performed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process for performing a lottery for switching to an AT mode in which a push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, a process is executed to determine the number of bets for the game to be started this time. That is, in step S601, it is determined whether either the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether the game to be started this time is in either BB state. conduct. If it is not the BB state, it is determined in step S602 whether the number of bets is 3 or not. Further, in the case of the BB state, it is determined in step S603 whether the number of bets is 2 or not. As already explained, in the non-internal state before winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB, or in the internal state after winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3, In this state, 3 is set as the specified number of bets. The processing in step S602 and step S603 is a process of determining whether the number of bets in the current game is a specific specified number (specific setting number) that is specified (set) in association with the gaming state. If the specified specified number does not exist, the lottery result handling process is ended without performing the display mode process (instruction function process) after step S604.

That is, in the non-internal state and internal state, processing for the display mode is executed in a 3-bet game, but processing for the display mode is not executed in a 2-bet game. Also, in the first BB state and second BB state, the specified number of bets is set to 3, so a 2-bet game is not executed, and processing for the display mode is not executed in the first BB state and second BB state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a two-bet game, the lottery for transition to the AT mode after step S604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing this, the internal state is set to a three-bet game, making it easier to play regular games that carry over the second BB.

If a positive judgment is made in step S602 or step S603, in step S604, it is judged whether or not an advantageous zone flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this slot machine 10, regarding the occurrence or non-occurrence of push order notifications, advantageous zones in which push order notifications, etc. may occur, and normal zones in which they may not occur are set. The advantageous zone flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the current game is in an advantageous zone, and is set when a transition to an advantageous zone occurs, and is cleared when a transition to a normal zone occurs.

If the advantageous zone flag is not set, this means that the current game is in the normal zone, in which case the advantageous zone transition lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result response process is terminated.

In the advantageous zone transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous zone transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. In the advantageous zone transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 30, the transition rate to the advantageous zone (the probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 30, the following are set as triggers for the transition lottery to the advantageous zone: normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon. In other words, in normal play as a 3-bet game with the second BB carried over, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the transition lottery to the advantageous zone.

After obtaining the lottery table in step S702, a process of obtaining a random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S703. The random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery is generated using a dedicated counter in the various counter areas 106e, which is updated at a predetermined interval, and the latest updated value of the counter is obtained in step S703. Then, in step S704, an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery has been won. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous zone transition lottery has a 100% probability regardless of the trigger role. In this case, if it is determined that the game result grasped in step S701 is a trigger role for the transition lottery (not a losing result), it is also possible to omit the processes in steps S702 to S705.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transfer lottery has been won, a process is executed to set an advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S706. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is a game in which a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after executing the process in step S706, the advantageous section transition lottery process is ended.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S604 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process advances to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether the first AT mode flag or the second AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. Here, in this embodiment, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are set as AT modes with different additional winning probabilities, and the first AT mode flag and the second AT mode flag indicate that it is an AT mode and its type. This is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp, and is set when transitioning to AT mode. If no AT mode flag is set in step S606, AT lottery processing is executed in step S607. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step S606, AT addition processing is executed in step S608.

<AT lottery processing>
First, the AT lottery process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.

In step S801, a process is executed to ascertain the lottery result of the current game. Then, in step S802, the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is ascertained by determining whether or not the first mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. That is, in this embodiment, the first mode and the second mode are set as lottery modes with different winning probabilities in the AT mode transition lottery, and are set so that the second mode is easier to win in the AT mode transition lottery than the first mode. The above-mentioned first mode flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to ascertain that the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is the first mode.

If the first mode flag is set in step S802, then in step S803 a process is executed to obtain a second mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a. On the other hand, if the first mode flag is not set in step S802, a process of acquiring a first mode transition lottery table is executed in step S804. The second mode transition lottery table is a table used in the AT lottery mode transition lottery to determine whether to transition from the first mode to the second mode, and the first mode transition lottery table is a table used in the AT lottery mode transition lottery to determine whether to transition from the first mode to the second mode. This is a table used in the AT lottery mode transition lottery to decide whether or not to shift to AT lottery mode.

These second mode transition lottery table and first mode transition lottery table are, as shown in FIG. The probability of winning the transition lottery) is set. As shown in FIG. 30, the triggers for the lottery to transition from the first mode to the second mode are normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry. A, Cherry B, Cherry C, and Watermelon are set. In the lottery for transition to the second mode, basically special roles called rare roles such as Chance Eye A, Chance Eye B, Chance Eye C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C, and Watermelon are selected. It is set to make it easier to win in the transition lottery triggered by the lottery. For example, in the transition lottery triggered by Normal Rip A to Normal Rip C, there is a 1% chance of winning, whereas in the transition lottery triggered by Cherry A, the probability is set to be 10%. . On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, the triggering roles for the lottery to shift from the second mode to the first mode are set as normal reply A, normal reply B, and normal reply C. It is not set as a trigger for the lottery for transition to 1 mode.

After obtaining each mode transition lottery table in step S803 or step S804, AT lottery mode transition lottery processing is executed in step S805. Then, in step S806, it is determined whether or not the AT lottery mode transition lottery has been won. If it is a winner, it is determined in step S807 whether the first mode flag is set.

If the first mode flag is set and the lottery for shifting from the first mode to the second mode is won, a process of clearing the first mode flag is executed in step S808. As a result, the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery shifts from the first mode to the second mode. Then, in step S809, a process of setting a second mode transition command is executed. The second mode transition command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to understand that the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery has transitioned from the first mode to the second mode. Processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the second mode transition command will be described in detail later.

If the first mode flag is not set in step S807 and the lottery for shifting from the second mode to the first mode is won, a process of setting the first mode flag is executed in step S810. As a result, the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery shifts from the second mode to the first mode. Then, in step S811, processing for setting a first mode transition command is executed. The first mode transition command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to understand that the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery has transitioned from the second mode to the first mode. Processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the first mode transition command will be described in detail later.

If a negative decision is made in step S806, or after the processing of step S809 or step S811 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether or not a lottery trigger flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. The lottery trigger flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to grasp that a specific opportunity has occurred to execute a lottery for transitioning to the AT mode. In this embodiment, the specific opportunity occurs when a predetermined number of games have been played after a transition to the advantageous zone has occurred, and more specifically, the lottery trigger flag is set when 50 games have been played after a transition to the advantageous zone has occurred.

If the lottery trigger flag is not set in step S812, a process is executed in step S813 to obtain a non-trigger AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a. If the lottery trigger flag is set, a determination is made in step S814 as to whether the first mode flag is set, and if the first mode flag is set, a process is executed in step S815 to obtain a first AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a. If the first mode flag is not set, a process is executed in step S816 to obtain a second AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a.

In the non-triggered AT mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 30, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is set according to the lottery result of the game. On the other hand, in the first AT mode transition lottery table and the second AT mode transition lottery table, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is set regardless of the lottery result of the game. More specifically, in the non-triggered AT mode transition lottery table, the above-mentioned specific combination is set as the trigger for the AT mode transition lottery. In this case, the AT mode transition lottery is not executed. In addition, in the first AT mode transition lottery table, there is a 10% chance of winning the AT mode transition lottery regardless of the game lottery result, and in the second AT mode transition lottery table, there is a 60% probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery regardless of the game lottery result. % probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery, and using the second AT mode transition lottery table is more likely to win the AT mode transition lottery than using the first AT mode transition lottery table. It is set up to be easy.

For more details about each AT mode transition lottery table, in the non-triggered AT mode transition lottery table, the AT mode transition lottery is executed using a specific role as the trigger role as described above, while the 1st AT mode transition lottery table and the 2nd AT mode transition lottery table In the mode transition lottery table, the AT mode transition lottery is executed regardless of the lottery result of the game, but the total probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery considering the ratio of the lottery results of each game is the non-triggered AT mode transition lottery. The table is set so that it is the least likely to win, and the second AT mode transition lottery table is the most likely to win. However, for example, if the lottery result of the game is Cherry C, there is a 100% chance of winning at the non-triggered AT mode transition lottery table, but at the first AT mode transition lottery table or the second AT mode transition lottery table, there is a 100% chance of winning. The table is set so that there may be no winnings, and depending on the lottery results of the game, it may be easier to win using the non-trigger AT mode transition lottery table.

After acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table in step S813, step S815, or step S816, the AT mode transition lottery table is executed in step S817. Then, in step S818, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition lottery has been won. If the AT mode transition lottery has been won, a process of setting an AT mode winning flag is executed in step S819. After executing the process of step S819, in step S820, a process of setting an AT winning notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the present AT lottery process is ended.

If it is determined in step S818 that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won, the process advances to step S821. In step S821, it is determined whether the lottery trigger flag is set, and it is determined whether the current AT mode transition lottery is a lottery based on a specific trigger. If it is an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity, a process is executed to clear the lottery trigger flag in step S822, and a process to set a trigger non-winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S823. The opportunity non-winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity was not won. Thereafter, in step S824, a process is executed to set the trigger non-winning command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery process ends. The trigger non-winning command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the AT mode shift lottery was not won based on a specific trigger, and the display control device 81 when receiving the trigger non-winning command The processing on this side will be explained in detail later. Further, if it is determined in step S821 that the AT mode transition lottery is not based on a specific opportunity, the AT lottery process is immediately terminated.

<AT top-up processing>
Next, the AT addition process executed in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 31. As already described, the AT addition process is a process executed when any of the AT mode flags is set, and is a process for adding the number of continued games in the AT mode.

In the AT addition processing, first, in step S901, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S902, a process of acquiring an additional lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are set with different probabilities of winning the additional jackpot, and the second AT mode is set to have a higher probability of winning the additional jackpot than the first AT mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, in the additional jackpot lottery table, the probability of winning the additional jackpot is set according to the lottery result of the game and the type of AT mode. For example, in the additional jackpot lottery triggered by Cherry A, the first AT mode is set to have a 5% probability of winning the additional jackpot lottery, while the second AT mode is set to have a 10% probability of winning the additional jackpot lottery.

In step S903, a lottery for adding is executed, and in step S904, it is determined whether or not the lottery for adding is won. If the lottery for adding is not won, the AT adding process is terminated. If the lottery for adding is won, the lottery process for the number of games to be added is executed in step S905. In the lottery process for the number of games to be added, the table for the number of games to be added is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the number of games to be added this time is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 32, the number of games to be added is set so that the number of games to be added differs depending on the lottery result of the game that triggered the addition. For example, when the addition is triggered by a normal lip A, an average of 150 games are added, while when the addition is triggered by a cherry A, an average of 15 games are added. In other words, the number of games to be added is greater when the addition is triggered by a trigger that is unlikely to win the lottery for adding.

After executing the process for drawing out the number of added games in step S905, a process is executed in step S906 to add the current number of added games to the AT counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The AT counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the AT mode. After executing the process in step S906, a process is executed in step S907 to set the add-on command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT add-on process is terminated. The display control device 81, which has received the add-on command, executes a process to perform an add-on notification effect corresponding to the addition on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64.

<Rotation effect setting process>
In this embodiment, the AT mode to be shifted to is determined after the AT mode winning flag is set and before the AT mode is shifted to. More specifically, the AT mode to be shifted to is determined in the spin effect processing at the start of reel spinning of the game that has won the AT mode shift lottery. The spin effect processing is a processing executed in step S401 in the reel control processing (FIG. 22) and is executed after the lottery processing (FIG. 19).

As shown in FIG. 33, in step S1001, it is determined whether the lottery trigger flag or the trigger non-winning flag is set, and whether the game is a game in which an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger has been performed. If neither flag is set, this rotation performance process is terminated as it is. If either flag is set, in step S1002, it is determined whether the lottery trigger flag is set, and if it is set, in step S1003, the lottery trigger flag is cleared. Then, in step S1004, an AT type determination process is executed. In the AT type determination process, for example, the current AT mode type is determined by lottery according to the set value, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased during the advantageous zone, the number of games during the advantageous zone, etc., or randomly. In the following step S1005, it is determined whether the processing result of step S1004 was the first AT mode. If the current AT mode is determined to be the first AT mode, the process executes step S1006 to set the first AT mode flag, and then in the following step S1007, the rotation effect for the first AT notification is set to be executed as the current rotation effect, and the rotation effect process ends.

As an example of the spin effect for the first AT notification, as shown in FIG. 47(b1), after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts to spin, as shown in FIG. 47(b2), the "white 7" symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped) on a specified line (middle line L2) as a symbol combination for the first AT corresponding to the first AT, as shown in FIG. 47(b2), and then, as shown in FIG. 47(b4), the spin effect for the first AT notification is set to resume. Note that the spin effect for the first AT notification is implemented during the inactive period after the game starts and before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective.

If the current AT mode is determined to be the second AT mode in step S1005, the process of setting the second AT mode flag is executed in step S1008, and then in the following step S1009, the rotation effect for the second AT notification is set to be executed as the current rotation effect, and the rotation effect process is terminated.

As an example of the second AT notification spin effect, as shown in FIG. 47(b1), after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts to spin, as shown in FIG. 47(b3), the "BAR" symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped) on a specified line (middle line L2) as a second AT symbol combination corresponding to the second AT, as shown in FIG. 47(b4), and then the spinning of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R resumes. Note that the second AT notification spin effect is implemented during the inactive period after the game starts and before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective.

If the lottery trigger flag is not set in step S1002 and the AT mode transition lottery based on the current specific trigger is not won, then in step S1010, a rotation performance for informing of failure is executed as the current rotation performance. After setting this, the rotation effect processing ends.

As an example of the spin effect for loss notification, as shown in FIG. 47(b1), after the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has started, neither the first AT symbol combination in FIG. 47(b2) nor the second AT symbol combination in FIG. 47(b3) is temporarily stopped, for example, the scattered numbers are temporarily stopped on a specific line (middle line L2), and then, as shown in FIG. 47(b4), the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R resumes. Note that the spin effect for loss notification is implemented during the inactive period after the game has started and before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, a notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won is executed in the game, the corresponding AT mode flag is set, and the transition to AT mode occurs. It turns out. When the shift to the AT mode occurs, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the push order bell is won can be notified.

As a spin effect, at the start of the game, the first AT symbol combination is temporarily stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to notify the player that a transition to the first AT mode will occur, and the second AT symbol combination is temporarily stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to notify the player that a transition to the second AT mode will occur. In this case, the auxiliary display unit 65 may be configured to notify the player that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, for example, by displaying text such as "AT confirmed" as shown in FIG. 47(a). The notification mode on the auxiliary display unit 65 may differ depending on the type of AT mode to be transitioned to, or may be a common notification mode regardless of the type of AT mode to be transitioned to.

The notification of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is executed in the processing of steps S609 to S612 in the lottery result response processing (FIG. 27). That is, after the AT lottery processing or the AT addition processing is executed in the processing of step S607 or step S608, the processing for notifying the push order is executed in steps S609 to S612.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to explaining the process for press order notification executed in steps S609 to S612, an overview of the press order notification executed on the instruction monitor 68 and the press order notification effect executed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be given. I will explain about it. Note that the press order notification and press order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, press order navigation, order notification, or mode notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 notifies you of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display section 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs a pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be explained with reference to FIG. 34. 34(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 34(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display content.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), the indication monitor 68 has eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of each of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. This allows the indication monitor 68 to display a specific symbol (including letters and numbers) individually. Note that each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, so the same color is displayed on each of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each of the display segments N1 to N8 in more detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are arranged so that they can at least display the numbers "1" to "6". The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged to the side of the lower right part of the area in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are arranged. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can at least display "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

In addition, as long as the indication monitor 68 can display multiple patterns of symbols individually, the shape and arrangement of each display segment N1 to N8 can be arbitrary, and a configuration using seven segments instead of eight segments, or nine segments, etc., may be used. In addition, it is not essential that the colors displayed in each display segment N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in each display segment N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, it is not essential to control the lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of a light source, and as long as the display control can be performed individually for each display segment N1 to N8, a segment display device may be configured with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Furthermore, instead of applying a segment display to each display area, symbols may be displayed using other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the operation order of the pressing combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 34(b), by performing the stop operations in the order of "left" → "middle" → "right" as the operation order of each stop switch 42 to 44, a winning mode advantageous to the player can be achieved. If so, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and "1" is displayed. Furthermore, if the winning mode is advantageous to the player by performing the stop operations in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the operation order of each stop switch 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit to display "5". In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed in each display segment N1 to N7 have a one-to-one correspondence with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in display segments N1 to N7. By operating the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit in a game where the start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition including a notification condition that transitions to an advantageous section and a press order notification can occur is established. . Further, the light is turned off when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section.

In other words, an advantageous zone (specific game state, specific mode) is a zone in which the operation order of the push order bell and the like is more easily notified, making it easier for the player to win in an advantageous manner, and the eighth display segment N8 serves as a zone indicator (specific notification means) that lights up during specific zones in which the player can actually benefit from the push order notification, and turns off during normal zones that are not advantageous zones, and during non-specific zones that are not specific zones even if they are advantageous zones.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68, which has the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as a press order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, displays the number of payout pieces on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display section 62. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located above the stop switches 42 to 44, etc. that are operated by the player. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44, etc. are provided, on the front surface of the gaming machine. is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hands operating the stop switches 42 to 44, etc., and is placed in a position where it is easily visible to the player. Also, since it is placed near the payout number display section 62, which is easy to watch for players who are playing the game with the aim of acquiring medals, it can be said that the chances of players overlooking it are suppressed.

Furthermore, the brightness of the corresponding LED is set so that the eighth display segment N8 in the instruction monitor 68 is brighter than the brightness of the surrounding display parts (e.g., the payout number display part 62 and the backlight of the gaming panel 25) (more specifically, twice as bright as the surrounding display parts). Therefore, even if the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display parts are both controlled to emit light (when they are in a lit state), the eighth display segment N8 stands out. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is also set so that the eighth display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine than the surrounding display parts (more specifically, twice as bright as the surrounding display parts). This configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, and prevents the eighth display segment N8 from being overlooked when it is in a lit state.

Next, the push order notification effect performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described using as an example a case where the push order role in which the currently notified operation order is center → right → left has been won.

As shown in FIG. 35(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays the button corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first among the three button displays arranged in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44 (in the figure, the middle stop The number 1 is added to the middle button (corresponding to the switch 43), and the button is displayed larger than the other button displays. Further, each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). Thereby, the player can recognize the winning combination in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. In addition, in the auxiliary display section 65, a number is displayed on the right button display to indicate that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44, and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. The number 2 is displayed and the number 3 is displayed on the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Buttons are displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 35(c), the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the left button display corresponding to the left stop switch 42 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

To explain the timing of the push order notification, it is set to be executed during the inactive period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts, through the acceleration period, until the reels reach constant speed rotation. By configuring the push order notification to be executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, it is possible for the player to recognize the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and then operate the stop switches 42 to 44 as desired, allowing the game to proceed at a good tempo.

The process for notifying the push order in steps S609 to S612 will be explained.

That is, in step S609, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current game is a push order bell win. If the push order bell is won, it is determined in step S610 whether the first AT mode flag or the second AT mode flag is set. If any AT mode flag is set, an instruction is given in step S611 to notify the pressing order corresponding to the 1st minor prize winning to the 6th minor prize winning according to the type of the current pressing order bell. Controls monitor 68. Then, in step S612, after executing a process of setting a push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor prize winnings as an output target to the display control device 81. , ends the main press order notification process. The display control device 81 that receives this press order notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that press order notification performances corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning combinations are performed.

If the push order bell is not won in step S609, or if none of the AT mode flags are set in step S610, the lottery result handling process is immediately terminated.

<Winning result processing>
Next, the winning result handling process carried out in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36. In the winning result corresponding process, a process for starting or ending the AT mode is performed depending on the game result.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether either the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether the game to be started this time is in any of the BB states. conduct. If it is not the BB state, it is determined in step S1102 whether the number of bets is 3 or not. If the game is in the BB state, it is determined in step S1103 whether the number of bets is 2 or not. That is, the processing from step S1101 to step S1103 corresponds to the processing from step S601 to step S603 described above, and it is determined whether or not the specified number is one specified in association with the gaming state. It is processing. If it is not the specified specified number, the winning result corresponding process is ended without performing the display mode process (instruction function process) after step S1104.

If the result of the judgment in step S1102 or step S1103 is positive and the number of bets is equal to the specified number, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is judged whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. When the AT mode winning flag is set, the AT mode winning flag is set when the current game starts. In this case, the process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S1105, and then the process of inputting "50" to the AT counter provided in the various counter area 106e is executed in step S1106. The AT counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games remaining in the AT mode, and is a counter that is decremented by one each time one game is played during the AT mode. In other words, the first AT mode and the second AT mode have different winning rates for the additional bonus, but the initial number of games set at the time of transition is the same.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1104, or after the process of step S1106 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1107. In step S1107, it is determined whether any of the AT mode flags are set. If any of the AT mode flags are set, the process of decrementing the AT counter by 1 is executed in step S1108. Then, in step S1109, it is determined whether the AT counter has become 0, and if it has become 0, the process of clearing the AT mode flag is executed in step S1110. Then, in step S1111, the process of setting the AT mode end flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The AT mode end flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the AT mode has ended. After that, in step S1112, the process of setting the AT end command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and the winning result corresponding process is terminated. The process on the display control device 81 side that received the AT end command will be explained in detail later. If none of the AT mode flags are set in step S1107, or if the AT counter is not 0 in step S1109, the winning result response process ends.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, a first section display process and a second section display process for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, moving it to an advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be explained.

<First section display process>
First, the first section display process will be described with reference to Fig. 37. The first section display process is a process carried out in step S314 in the lottery process (Fig. 19), and is carried out after the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and a lottery for switching the display mode is carried out based on the lottery result (lottery result corresponding process).

In step S1201, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, when the eighth display segment N8 is being lit, it indicates when the advantageous section is a specific section in which at least the notification conditions for the push order notification to occur are met. If a negative determination is made in step S1201 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether an advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the advantageous section flag is not set, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag is set. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous section transfer lottery is won in the advantageous section transfer lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that this is the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, processing for clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1204. Then, in step S1205, processing for setting an advantageous section flag is executed.

In step S1206, processing is performed to start counting the number of games in the advantageous section, more specifically, to start measuring the number of games AG in the advantageous section in various counter areas 106e. The number of games in the advantageous section AG corresponds to a means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous section. Then, in step S1207, advantageous section transition game processing is executed. In the advantageous section transition game process, for example, the number of ceiling games in the AT mode is set as the setting of the advantageous section to be transferred this time.

After executing the advantageous section transition game process in step S1207, or if it is determined in step S1202 that the advantageous section winning game flag is set, it is determined in step S1203 that the advantageous section winning game flag is not set. If so, the process advances to step S1208. In step S1208, it is determined whether any AT mode flag is set and the display start condition for the section display is satisfied. If any AT mode flag is set, in step S1209, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on to start displaying the section display.

If it is determined in step S1201 that the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, then in step S1210 a process is executed to continue displaying the advantageous section. Specifically, in step S1210, processing is performed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. That is, the process for terminating the display of the section display is not performed in the first section display process.

If it is determined in step S1208 that none of the AT mode flags are set, the process advances to step S1211. In step S1211, a process of adding 1 to a first hand ratio counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The first hand ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which push order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

After executing the display start process of the section indicator in step S1209, and after executing the display continuation process in step S1210, the process proceeds to step S1212. In step S1212, a process is executed to add 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games that can generate a push order notification, i.e., the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process in step S1211 or step S1212, a win ratio calculation process is executed in step S1213. In this process, the value of the second hand ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first hand ratio counter and the second hand ratio counter. That is, the hand ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which press order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1214, processing is executed to display the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1213 on the winning ratio monitor 77.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has multiple 7-segment display sections consisting of seven display segments. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as 7-segment display sections. The display segments in the first display section 77a to the fifth display section 77e have individual light sources made of LEDs, similar to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one display segment, and to light any combination of display segments. As a result, each role ratio monitor 77 is designed to display a specific symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 is capable of displaying five-digit numbers.

In step S1214, the result of the calculation process in step S1213 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and the display of each display section 77a to 77e on the role ratio monitor 77 is controlled so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Specifically, a number smaller than 1 and up to four decimal places, such as "0.5012," is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 as the ratio of the number of games in which a push order notification may occur out of the total number of games. After the process of step S1214 is executed, the first section display process is terminated.

Note that the display of the role ratio monitor 77 may be controlled after rounding off the 5th decimal place in the calculation process of step S1213. In addition, since the first display unit 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display unit 77a may not be included, or the first display unit 77a may be configured to always display "0" by printing or the like. It is also preferable to configure the first display unit 77a and the second display unit 77b to display a decimal point by printing or the like between them.

<Second Section Display Process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 38. As already described, the second section display process is a process that is performed in step S416 of the reel control process, and is performed after medals are paid out (payout determination process) and the game state is changed based on the winning result (winning result response process) at the end of one game.

In step S1301, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag is set. If it has not been set, the second section display process ends. If the advantageous section flag is set, in step S1302, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of advantageous zone games AG is performed. After executing the process in step S1302, in step S1303, a process is executed to update the number of increase/decrease tickets MY (MY counter) in advantageous sections provided in various counter areas 106e.

In the MY update process of step S1303, provided that the result of the current game is not a replay win, the number of coins inserted (number of coins bet) is subtracted from the number of coins paid out, and the subtraction result is added to the number of coins increased or decreased in the favorable zone, MY, thereby updating the number of coins increased or decreased in the favorable zone.

After executing the MY update process in step S1303, in step S1304, a remaining game number management process is executed, and in the following step S1305, a remaining number management process is executed. The remaining game number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit game number (1500 games) with the current remaining number of games based on the remaining number of games in the AT mode, etc. In the remaining game number management process, for example, it is grasped whether or not the total of the advantageous zone game number AG (the number of games consumed in the advantageous zone) and the AT counter (the remaining number of games in the AT mode) is greater than the upper limit game number of the advantageous zone. Then, if such a situation is found, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying that situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit increase number (2400 coins) with the current remaining number of games based on the remaining number of games in the AT mode, etc. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, it is determined whether the sum of the expected increase calculated from the AT counter and the average increase per game in AT mode and the current increase/decrease in the favorable zone MY is greater than the increase/decrease in the favorable zone. If this is the case, a second excess flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation.

In the subsequent step S1306, processing is executed to set the advantageous section game command as an output target to the display control device 81. The advantageous section game command includes the contents of the processing results of steps S1302 to S1305 described above. That is, the advantageous section game command includes information on the number of advantageous section games AG, information on the MY counter, and information on the presence or absence of the first excess flag and the second excess flag. The processing on the display control device 81 side that receives the advantageous section game command will be described in detail later.

In the next step S1307, a lottery trigger determination process is executed. The lottery trigger determination process is a process for determining whether or not a specific trigger for executing an AT mode transition lottery has occurred.

<Lottery opportunity determination process>
In the lottery opportunity determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, in step S1401, a process is executed to determine whether the number of advantageous section games AG is a predetermined number. More specifically, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 50 or not. If it is not 50, the lottery opportunity determination process is directly ended. If it is 50, the process advances to step S1402, and a process of setting a lottery trigger flag is executed. By executing such processing, an AT mode transition lottery based on the lottery trigger flag will be executed in the lottery result corresponding process of the next game.

In the following step S1403, processing is executed to set the lottery trigger command as an output target to the display control device 81. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the lottery trigger command will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1403, the lottery opportunity determination process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the second interval display process, after executing the lottery trigger determination process in step S1307, it is determined in step S1308 whether the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has reached the upper limit of 1500, or whether the number of increases or decreases in the advantageous interval MY has reached the upper limit of increases of 2400 or more. If either of these forced termination conditions is met, in step S1309, the number of games in the advantageous interval AG and the number of increases or decreases in the advantageous interval MY are cleared to 0. In the following step S1310, a process is performed to terminate the display of the eighth display segment N8 as an interval display. Then, in step S1311, a process is performed to initialize parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous interval, and then the second interval display process is terminated.

More specifically, the initialization process for the advantageous zone information in step S1311 is a process for resetting flags and counters set at the time of the transition to the current advantageous zone, and flags and counters set during the current advantageous zone, to their initial values. For example, if the advantageous zone flag, AT mode win flag, various AT mode flags, etc. are not cleared but are set, these flags are cleared. Furthermore, if the advantageous zone game count AG, advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY, counters for the number of continued games in AT mode, etc. are greater than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables or parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification for the advantageous zone as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and is a process for clearing the RAM for such variables or parameters.

If it is determined in step S1308 that the number of games in the favorable zone AG has not reached the upper limit and the number of increase/decrease coins in the favorable zone MY has not reached the upper limit increase, the process proceeds to step S1312, where it is determined whether or not the AT mode end flag has been set. If the AT mode end flag has been set, the process proceeds to step S1309, where processing for the end of the favorable zone is executed. If the AT mode end flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S1313, where it is determined whether or not the trigger non-win flag has been set. If the trigger non-win flag has been set, the process proceeds to step S1309, where processing for the end of the favorable zone is executed.

That is, in this embodiment, after shifting to the advantageous section, a lottery for transition to AT mode is held, and if the transition lottery is won, the transition to AT mode is performed. When the AT mode ends, the advantageous section also ends together with the end of the AT mode. Further, when the number of games after the shift to the advantageous section reaches 50, an AT mode shift lottery is held based on a specific opportunity, and the advantageous section ends even if the player does not win the AT mode shift lottery.

In contrast, if neither the AT mode end flag nor the trigger non-winning flag is set, the second section display process ends without ending the advantageous section.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the process related to the instruction function such as the AT mode transition lottery, the additional lottery, and the mode transition lottery of the AT mode transition lottery is performed by placing a specified number of bets set according to the gaming state. It is executed in a game, and is not executed in a game where a bet other than the specified number of bets is placed. More specifically, in the first BB state or the state before transitioning to the second BB state, such as the non-internal state or internal state, both the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game are executable. Because of this setting, in the non-internal state or internal state, processing related to the instruction function is executed in a 3-bet game, but processing related to the instruction function is not executed in a 2-bet game. On the other hand, in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, only the 3-bet game can be executed, but since the specific regulation number is set as 2, the instruction function is not related to the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state. No processing is performed. That is, although the process related to the instruction function is executed in the 3-bet game in the non-internal state or the internal state, the process related to the instruction function is not executed in the 2-bet game or each BB state in the non-internal state or the internal state.

On the other hand, the specific opportunity that triggers the AT mode transition lottery is defined by the number of advantageous section games AG, which is counted regardless of the number of bets or the state, as described above, and the number of advantageous section games AG is 50. As a result, the lottery trigger flag is set. More specifically, the number of advantageous zone games AG is counted not only by the number of 3-bet games in the non-internal state and internal state, but also by the number of 2-bet games in the non-internal state and internal state, and the number of games in each BB state. Ru.

For example, by playing a two-bet game in a non-internal state or an internal state, no processing related to the instruction function is performed, but it is possible to set the lottery trigger flag. In this case, the AT mode transition lottery based on the lottery trigger flag is executed in the first play of a specific specified number of times after the lottery trigger flag is set. In other words, in a game that switches from a two-bet game to a three-bet game in a non-internal state or an internal state, the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger is executed.

More specifically, as part of the processing related to the instruction function, the AT mode transition lottery mode transition occurs in a 3-bet game in a non-internal state or an internal state, but it also occurs in a 2-bet game in a non-internal state or an internal state. In each BB state, the AT mode transition lottery mode does not shift. On the other hand, the specific opportunity occurs 50 games after the transition to the advantageous section, regardless of the gaming state or the number of bets. Therefore, for example, by playing a 3-bet game in a non-internal state or an internal state, the AT lottery mode transition lottery process is executed, and the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is transferred from the first mode to the second mode. After the AT lottery mode transition lottery process is successfully executed, the game is continued as a 2-bet game until a specific opportunity occurs, thereby making it possible to avoid executing the AT lottery mode transition lottery process again. In this way, it is possible to generate a specific opportunity while staying in the second mode, and then by switching to a 3-bet game, an AT mode transition lottery using the second AT mode transition lottery table on the high probability side can be performed. It becomes possible to realize a game such as "receiving".

In this embodiment, it is possible to realize the above-mentioned novel game by utilizing the relationship between the execution or non-execution of the process related to the instruction function defined by the specific specified number and the specific opportunity that occurs regardless of the specific specified number. The following describes the presentation process for realizing the above-mentioned game.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 40. The effect setting process is a process activated by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the effect setting process, first in step S1501, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1502. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and read out the previously stored commands.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1501, or after the processing of step S1502 is executed, in step S1503, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is a betting command. A betting command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on a betting operation being performed, such as a betting command set in step S206 of normal processing. If it is a betting command, in step S1504, a betting performance setting process is executed to set the performance based on the current betting operation.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, or after executing the process in step S1504, it is determined in step S1505 whether the newly received command is a start command. The start command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes a lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, as well as a command corresponding to the lottery result. There are first mode transition commands, second mode transition commands, AT winning notification commands, opportunity non-winning commands, additional commands, push order notification commands, etc. that are set in the process (FIG. 27). If it is one of these start time commands, start time effect setting processing is executed in step S1506.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1505, or after the processing of step S1506 is executed, in step S1507, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is a command at each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a stop command command set in step S405 of the reel control processing (FIG. 22). If the stop command is a stop command at each stop operation, in step S1508, each stop operation effect setting processing is executed to set the effect based on the current stop operation.

If a negative determination is made in step S1507, or after executing the process in step S1508, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. In addition to the commands, the 1st BB start command, 2nd BB start command, 1st BB end command, which are set in bonus status processing (FIG. 24), winning result corresponding processing (FIG. 36), and second section display processing (FIG. 38), There are a second BB end command, an AT end command, an advantageous section game command, a lottery trigger command, and the like. If it is one of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S1510.

If a negative determination is made in step S1509, or after executing the process in step S1510, other processes are executed in step S1511, and then the effect setting process is ended. In step S1511, the auxiliary display section 65, speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that the various effects set in each of the above effect setting processes are executed at the corresponding timing. In addition, in step S1511, effects are set based on commands from the main controller 101 at times other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), and settings are made without going through the main controller 101. Perform settings for effects, settings for error notification, etc. based on signals from sensors (effect switch detection sensors, etc.) connected to the controller.

The start effect setting process and the full stop effect setting process will be described below.

<Start production setting process>
The start effect setting process in step S1506 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 41.

In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is a push order role win (push order bell win) based on the received lottery result command. If the push order role wins, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not a push order notification command has been received. If a push order notification command has been received, in step S1603, settings are executed so that the push order notification effects corresponding to the first small role win through the sixth small role win are performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64.

If it is determined in step S1601 that the lottery result of the current game is not a push-order win, it is determined in step S1604 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a specific win. As already explained, the specific combination is a lottery result called a so-called rare combination that is difficult to appear in the lottery results of each game (hard to win), and in this embodiment, chance number A to chance number C, cherry. A to Cherry C and Watermelon are set as specific hands. As shown in Figure 30, even if no specific trigger has occurred, AT mode shift lottery results may be triggered by these lottery results, and as shown in Figure 33, AT mode transition lottery results may be triggered by these lottery results. In the additional lottery in the mode, it is set so that additional winnings are more likely to occur than when the result of a lottery other than a specific combination is used as an opportunity. If the lottery result of the current game is a specific winning combination, a specific winning combination notification process is executed in step S1605. In the specific winning combination notification process, settings are made so that the specific winning combination notification that the lottery result of the current game is one of the above specific winning combinations is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. As a specific winning combination notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 48(b), three exclamation mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided. A performance has been set up.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1602 or step S1604, or after the processing of step S1603 or step S1605 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, it is judged whether or not an add-on command has been received. If an add-on command has been received, a process for setting the add-on effect is executed in step S1607. In the process for setting the add-on effect, an add-on effect is executed in which the number of games added is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a notification corresponding to the addition of the number of remaining games in the AT mode. Note that the mode of the add-on effect is not limited to the mode performed in the game in which the add-on is performed, and may include, for example, a mode in which the number of games added is notified after a predetermined number of games, triggered by the game in which the add-on is performed, or may include a so-called post-add-on effect in which the add-on effect is executed when the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes a predetermined number (for example, one game remaining).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1606, or after the processing of step S1607 is executed, the AT selection mode notification processing is executed in step S1608. As already explained, in this embodiment, the selection modes for the AT mode transition lottery are set to a first mode, which is less likely to be won in the AT mode transition lottery, and a second mode, which is easier to win than the first mode. In this embodiment, a special notification may be executed to indicate whether the player is in the first mode or the second mode, and the AT selection mode notification processing is processing for setting the execution conditions of the special notification.

<AT lottery mode notification process>
In the AT lottery mode notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether a first mode shift command has been received as the current start command. If the first mode transition command has been received, a process of setting a first flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S1702. The first flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to understand that the AT lottery mode is the first mode on the low probability side.

If the determination in step S1701 is negative, or after the process in step S1702 is executed, in step S1703, it is determined whether or not a second mode transition command has been received as the current start command. If a second mode transition command has been received, in step S1704, a process is executed to clear the first flag.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or after executing the process in step S1704, it is determined in step S1705 whether or not a chance non-winning command has been received as the current start command. As already explained, the trigger non-winning command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger results in a non-winning. If the trigger non-winning command has been received, in step S1706, a process of adding 1 to the trigger through counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The opportunity through counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to keep track of the consecutive number of times the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity has not been won. Processing for executing the special notification will be described in detail later, but in this embodiment, the special notification in the second mode can be executed according to the value of the trigger through counter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or after executing the process in step S1706, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not an AT winning notification command has been received as the current start command. If the AT winning notification command has been received, in step S1708, the process of clearing the trigger through counter to 0 is executed, and then the AT lottery mode notification process is ended. Further, if the AT winning notification command is not received in step S1707, the AT lottery mode notification process is immediately terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the start effect setting process, after executing the AT lottery mode notification process in step S1608, in step S1609, the AT winning notification command or the trigger non-winning command is received as the current starting command. Determine whether or not the If an AT winning notification command or an opportunity non-winning command is received, there is a high possibility that an AT mode transition lottery was held based on a specific opportunity.More specifically, an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity or a specific role This is a case where the player wins in the AT mode shift lottery based on winning (AT win notification command), or a case where the player does not win in the AT mode shift lottery based on a specific opportunity (trigger non-winning command). In this embodiment, in these cases, a result notification effect is executed on the auxiliary display section 65 to notify the result of the AT mode transition lottery.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52, the result notification effect is such that a main character and an enemy character battle, and if the main character wins the battle, it is notified that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, and if the main character loses the battle, it is notified that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won. More specifically, when the result notification effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 52(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 first displays text such as "Battle begins!!" and displays an animation of the enemy character as a start effect of the battle. Then, after an attack effect shown in FIG. 52(b1) showing the main character attacking, and an attack effect shown in FIG. 52(b2) showing the enemy character attacking, the result notification effect ends with either a victory effect (FIG. 52(c1)) in which the main character wins, or a defeat effect (FIG. 52(c2)) in which the main character is defeated. In this case, if the AT mode transition lottery that triggered the result notification effect is a winning result, a winning effect will be executed, and if the AT mode transition lottery is a non-winning result, a losing effect will be executed.

When an AT winning notification command or a trigger non-winning command is received in step S1609, the process for executing the above result notification performance is performed in steps S1610 to S1613. That is, in step S1610, as the start process of the result notification performance, a performance setting process is performed so that the start performance of FIG. 52 (a) is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. More specifically, the performance data for the start performance is obtained from the performance table stored in the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and the performance data is set so that the performance based on the performance data is executed on the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) at the corresponding timing. In this case, in the other processes of step S1511 in the performance setting process (FIG. 40), the display control device 81 reads out the performance data at the corresponding timing and controls the corresponding notification means so that the performance is performed with the read data. In this way, the performance set in the various performance setting processes is executed at the desired timing. The process for setting up and executing these effects is similar for other effects, so the explanation below will generally be omitted.

Incidentally, when an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger is performed, as already explained, the rotation effect process (Fig. 33) is set to perform a rotation effect during the inactive period of the stop switches 42 to 44. In this case, when a result notification effect for an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger is executed, the above-mentioned start effect is set to produce a victory effect or a defeat effect before the occurrence of a pause (Fig. 47(b2), Fig. 47(b3)) corresponding to the result of the AT mode transition lottery or the type of AT mode in the above-mentioned rotation effect. Then, a victory effect on the result notification effect side is performed, and after a pause corresponding to the type of AT mode on the rotation effect side is performed, the AT winning notification effect of Fig. 47(a) is performed.

On the other hand, when a result notification performance based on a specific combination is performed, the specific combination notification performance is performed before the result notification performance (step S1605). In this case, for example, the timing of occurrence of each performance may be set so that the result notification performance is performed as a continuous performance that is executed over multiple games, or the timing of occurrence of each performance may be set so that the result notification performance is performed as a continuous performance that is executed over multiple games. The result notification performance may be set to start at a timing after the role notification performance, and the result notification performance may end in the game.

After executing the process in step S1610, it is determined in step S1611 whether the command currently received is an AT winning notification command, and if it is an AT winning notification command, in step S1612 Performance setting processing is executed so that the current result notification performance is finally ended as a victory performance. In this case, it is preferable to make the attack presentation more likely to be selected than the attack presentation.

If in step S1611 the command currently received is not an AT win notification command but a trigger non-win command, in step S1613 a presentation setting process is executed so that the current result notification presentation will ultimately end as a defeat presentation. In this case, it is preferable to make it easier to select an attacked presentation than an attacking presentation.

If no command has been received in step S1609, or after executing the process in step S1612 or S1613, the process advances to step S1614. In step S1614, BB notification first processing is executed. This process is a process for performing a game effect using the first BB state and the second BB state, and will be explained in detail later. Thereafter, in step S1615, other start effect setting processing is executed, and then the main start effect setting process is ended. In step S1615, for example, processing is executed to set an effect suggesting the lottery result in response to the start of the game, to turn off the lamp around the start lever 41, and to notify that the operation has been accepted. do.

<Processing for setting effects when fully stopped>
Next, the full stop effect setting process in step S1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. As already explained, the all-stop performance setting process sets the effect when the newly received command is an all-stop command such as a winning result command, an AT end command, an advantageous section game command, or a lottery trigger command. This is a process to perform.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not an AT end command has been received. If an AT end command has been received, in step S1802, effect settings are executed to perform an AT end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. For example, the AT end effect displays the number of games continued in the current AT mode and the number of medals acquired in the current AT mode on the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in FIG. 48(a).

If a negative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not an advantageous section game command has been received. If an advantageous section game command is received, it is determined in step S1804 whether the current display mode is the AT mode, and if it is not the AT mode, that is, it is an advantageous section and the transition to the AT mode is made. If it is the previous state, the process advances to step S1805. In step S1805, lottery trigger notification processing is executed, and in subsequent step S1806, special notification processing is executed.

After executing the process of step S1802 or step S1806, if a negative judgment is made in step S1803 or if a positive judgment is made in step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1807, the second BB notification process is executed. This process is for performing game effects using the first BB state or the second BB state, and will be described in detail later. After that, in step S1808, other all-stop effect setting processes are executed, and then the all-stop effect setting process is terminated. In step S1808, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, a sound effect corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, and a sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet during replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

<Lottery opportunity notification process>
In the lottery trigger notification process in step S1805, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44, in step S1901, the effect setting is executed to perform the game number notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. The game number notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of games from the transition to the advantageous zone until the occurrence of a specific trigger. More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 49(a), the number of games until the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger caused by the lottery trigger flag being set is notified based on the information on the advantageous zone game number AG of the currently received advantageous zone game command, such as "50 games left until the chance" (FIG. 49(a) shows that the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger will be performed after 50 games). In this case, for example, as the game in the advantageous zone progresses, the number of games notified in the game number notification effect is also subtracted and updated every game (see FIG. 49(b)). Then, when the number of games until a specific trigger occurs becomes 0 and the specific trigger occurs, the number of games announced in the game number announcement presentation will also become 0, as shown in Figure 50 (a) (displaying "0 games left until chance").

In the following step S1902, it is determined whether the game to be ended this time is a 3-bet game. If it is a 3-bet game, it is determined in step S1903 whether the game is in the first BB state or the second BB state. If it is determined in step S1902 that the game is not a 3-bet game, or if the game is in the first BB state or second BB state in step S1903, a restricted state (regulatory state, restricted game ). In this case, in step S1904, effect settings for performing a mode shift restriction notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are executed. The mode shift restriction notification performance is a performance to notify the player of the above-mentioned restriction state. For example, as shown in FIG. By displaying characters such as "!", the restricted state is notified.

If a negative determination is made in step S1903 and after executing the process in step S1904, it is determined in step S1905 whether or not a lottery trigger command has been received. If the lottery trigger command has not been received, the lottery trigger notification process is immediately ended. If the lottery trigger command has been received, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not the game to be ended this time is a 3-bet game. If it is a 3-bet game, it is determined in step S1907 whether the game is in the first BB state or the second BB state.

When it is a 3-bet game and not in the first BB state or the second BB state, it means that the game is being played with a specific prescribed number of bets in a non-internal state or an internal state, and it is in an allowable state (allowed play) in which the execution of processing related to the instruction function is allowed. In other words, it is a case where a lottery trigger command is received in the allowable state. In this case, in step S1908, the lottery notice effect is set to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64, and then the lottery notice notification process is terminated. The lottery notice effect is an effect to notify the player that the lottery trigger command has been received in the allowable state, that is, that the next game will also be performed in the allowable state, and an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger will be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the main character is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, and then text such as "Next time, battle!!" is displayed.

On the other hand, when a lottery trigger command is received and it is a two-bet game, or in the first or second BB state, it means that the game is being played with a bet other than the specific specified number, and the execution of the processing related to the instruction function is restricted. In other words, it is when the lottery trigger command is received in the restricted state. In this case, in step S1909, the effect setting for performing the waiting effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed, and then the lottery trigger notification process is terminated. The waiting effect is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery trigger command has been received in the above-mentioned restricted state, that is, that the game will be played by switching from the restricted state to the allowed state from the next game onwards, and an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger will be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the main character is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, and text such as "Defeat the enemy with MAXBET!!" is displayed.

Note that MAXBET here refers to the first credit insertion switch 56. As already explained, by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, a bet number corresponding to the MAX bet counter is bet; more specifically, 2 bets are set in the non-internal state, 3 bets are set in the internal state, and 3 bets are set in the first BB state and second BB state. In other words, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, there are cases where a game is played with a bet based on a specific prescribed number (internal state and each BB state) and cases where a game is not played with a bet based on a specific prescribed number (non-internal state).

In this way, as shown in FIG. 50(b), when a lottery trigger command is received and a specific trigger occurs (the lottery trigger flag is set), a lottery preview performance or A standby performance is executed. Then, when the next game is executed as a 2-bet game while these lottery preview performances and standby performances are being executed, the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity will not be possible in the game executed as a 2-bet game. Not executed. In this case, the standby effect is executed again.

On the other hand, if the next game is executed as a 3-bet game in a situation where a lottery preview performance or standby performance is being executed, a specific trigger will be applied, provided that the game is not in the first BB state or second BB state. The AT mode transition lottery based on is executed, and the result notification effect (battle effect) based on the AT winning notification command or the trigger non-winning command is executed.

<Special notification processing>
Next, the special notification process executed in step S1806 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2001, processing is executed to grasp the trigger through counter described above. As already explained, the opportunity through counter is a counter that indicates the number of consecutive times that the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity has not been won. In the following step S2002, it is determined whether the first flag is set. If the first flag is set and the lottery mode for the AT mode shift lottery is the first mode on the low probability side, in step S2003, the process of acquiring the first special notification lottery table from the various table storage areas 182a is performed. Execute. Further, if the first flag is not set in step S2002 and the lottery mode for the AT mode shift lottery is the second mode on the high probability side, the second special notification is sent from the various table storage areas 182a in step S2004. Execute the process to obtain the lottery table. Then, in step S2005, a special notification lottery process is executed using the special notification lottery table acquired in step S2003 or step S2004. The special notification lottery process is a process in which it is determined by a lottery whether or not to execute a special notification as a suggestion of the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery.

When comparing the first special notification lottery table (Figure 46(a)) and the second special notification lottery table (Figure 46(b)), the special notification lottery using the second special notification lottery table is set up to make it easier for a special notification to occur. In other words, the special notification is a presentation that suggests that you are in the second mode.

The first special notification lottery table and the second special notification lottery table are set so that the occurrence rate of the special notification varies depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process and the value of the trigger through counter. More specifically, the higher the setting value and the higher the ball payout rate, the higher the occurrence rate of the special notification even with the same trigger through counter value, and the higher the value of the trigger through counter is, the higher the occurrence rate of the special notification even with the same setting value.

After executing the special notification lottery process in step S2005, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the special notification lottery has been won. If the special notification lottery has been won, in step S2007, effect settings for making the special notification on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are executed, and then the special notification process ends. If the player has not won the special notification lottery, the special notification process is immediately terminated. As a special notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 49(b) or FIG. 51(a), a flame is ignited behind the main character on the auxiliary display section 65, and an effect indicating that the main character's spirit is increasing. is set.

<Game flow>
Next, the basic flow of the game will be described with reference to the timing chart of Fig. 53. Note that Fig. 53 will be described assuming a game in an internal state in which the 2nd BB win has been carried over.

As shown in FIG. 53, when the above-mentioned internal state is played in a 3-bet game and the transition to an advantageous section is made through the advantageous section transition lottery at timing t1, the number of games until the lottery trigger flag is set, that is, the specific trigger Counting of the number of games until this occurs begins. Since the game in the internal state 3-bet game is a game with a specific prescribed number, the advantageous section transfer lottery is executed as described above, and the transfer to the advantageous section also occurs. Further, an AT mode transition lottery after transition to an advantageous section may also be executed, and a transition lottery for the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery (mode transition lottery) may also be executed.

For example, the AT mode transition lottery mode shifts to the second mode at timing t2, and shifts to the first mode at timing t3. However, these lottery modes affect the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity, so even if a mode transition occurs at timing t2 or t3 before a specific opportunity, the mode information cannot be used. The AT mode transition lottery that was used will not be executed. When the number of games after shifting to the advantageous section reaches 50 games at timing t4, a lottery trigger flag is set as a specific trigger has occurred. Then, in the next game, an AT mode transition lottery is executed based on a specific opportunity. In addition, in the figure, the game in which a specific opportunity occurs and the game in which the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is executed are both shown as timing t4, but in reality, as mentioned above, there is a difference of one game. is occurring.

As described above, the transition to the first mode occurs at the timing t3, and the first mode is maintained until the timing t4. Therefore, the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity at timing t4 is executed in the first mode on the low probability side. If the AT mode shift lottery at timing t4 is not won, the opportunity non-win flag is set, and the advantageous section ends in the game (section display second process).

At time t5, the game moves to the favorable zone, and the count of the number of games until a specific opportunity occurs begins. At time t6, the game moves to the second mode, and while maintaining the lottery mode (without moving to the first mode), if a specific opportunity occurs at time t7, an AT mode transition lottery is executed in the second mode, which has a higher probability. If the AT mode transition lottery is a win, the display mode moves to the AT mode, and the AT mode ends at time t8, ending the favorable zone (second zone display process).

When the game transitions to the advantageous zone at time t9, if the game is switched from a 3-bet game to a 2-bet game at time t10, the execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted in the 2-bet game, and therefore the execution of the mode transition lottery is also restricted. In this case, the first mode before the switch to the 2-bet game is maintained.

However, the counting of the number of games until the specific opportunity occurs is performed regardless of whether the number of bets is the specified number or not, so the specific opportunity occurs at the timing of t11, which is 50 games after the timing of t9. , the lottery trigger flag is set. On the other hand, since the AT mode transition lottery is a process related to the instruction function, even if the lottery trigger flag is set, the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger is not executed in a 2-bet game. Then, by switching to the 3-bet game at timing t12, an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is executed. Note that the AT mode transition lottery at t12 is executed in the first mode with low probability, and the figure shows that there was no winner in the AT mode transition lottery, and the AT mode transition lottery at t12 is advantageous. The section also ends.

When the game moves to the favorable zone at time t13, and then the first mode is switched to the second mode at time t14, and then the game is switched from the 3-bet game to the 2-bet game at time t15, the execution of the mode transition lottery is restricted as described above. Therefore, the second mode before the switch to the 2-bet game is maintained. As described above, the count of the number of games until the specific trigger occurs continues even in the 2-bet game, so at time t16, the specific trigger occurs and the lottery trigger flag is set. After that, by switching to the 3-bet game at time t17, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is executed, and the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the second mode with high probability. In the figure, it is shown that the AT mode transition lottery was won, and the AT mode is started at time t17.

In this way, in this embodiment, a first mode on the low probability side and a second mode on the high probability side are provided as the lottery modes for the AT mode transition lottery, and the transition of the lottery mode and the AT mode transition lottery are executed in a game with a bet number according to a specific prescribed number, and the specific trigger occurs regardless of whether the number of bets is the specific prescribed number. Therefore, it is possible to generate a specific trigger while maintaining the second mode on the high probability side, and it is possible to realize innovative gameplay that utilizes such a specific prescribed number.

In this case, as described above, the player can predict whether the lottery mode is the first mode or the second mode based on the occurrence rate of the special notification. In other words, since the occurrence rate of the special notification is higher when the lottery mode is in the second mode than when the lottery mode is in the first mode, it is possible to realize a game in which the player determines whether the lottery mode is in the second mode while referring to the special notification and switches the number of bets.

Moreover, the special notification is made to occur more easily as the number of consecutive times that the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is not won increases. By doing this, it becomes possible to compensate for the fact that it is difficult to win the AT mode transition lottery, and it is possible to realize a so-called ceiling function simply by using lottery mode notifications such as special notifications.

If the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger is not won, the advantageous zone may end, and an initialization process for advantageous zone information is executed when the advantageous zone ends. Therefore, the number of consecutive times that the AT mode transition lottery based on the above-mentioned specific trigger is not won is stored in the sub-side display control device 81, so that the ceiling function of the AT mode transition lottery can be optimally realized while assuming a configuration in which the information for each advantageous zone is not carried over on the main control device 101 side.

Here, for example, if you do not win the AT mode transition lottery, instead of ending the advantageous section every time, decide whether to end the advantageous section according to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section (1500 games). A configuration that determines this is also conceivable. In other words, for example, at the time of not winning the AT mode transition lottery, if the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is equal to or more than the predetermined number of games, the non-winning of the AT mode transition lottery will be used as a trigger. While the advantageous section is not ended, if the number of games is less than a predetermined number, a configuration may be considered in which the advantageous section is ended based on non-winning of the AT mode transition lottery. In such a configuration, the main control device 101 can manage the consecutive number of times the winning result has not been won, so it is also possible to realize a ceiling function on the main control device 101 side. In this case, a command corresponding to the consecutive number of times is output to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 side manages whether or not to execute special notification according to the consecutive number of times, or the main control device 101 side controls the execution of the special notification depending on the consecutive number of times. Based on this, it is determined whether or not to execute a special notification, and when a special notification is to be executed, a command to that effect is output to the display control device 81, thereby making it possible to realize a ceiling function based on the occurrence rate of the special notification. be.

On the other hand, if the set value is changed, for example, before the opening of a game hall, the RAM clearing process on the main controller 101 side is executed, and the number of consecutive times managed on the main controller 101 side is also changed. It will be deleted. This increases the possibility that whether or not the set value has been changed can be detected based on whether or not the ceiling function is activated based on the number of consecutive times. In this regard, as described above, by configuring the display control device 81 to manage the number of consecutive times, even if the main control device 101 executes the RAM clearing process due to a change in the setting value, the situation will not be affected. It is possible to activate the ceiling function without any involvement. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to detect whether or not the setting value has been changed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted not only in the 2-bet game in the non-internal state or the internal state, but also in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, it is possible to restrict the mode transition of the AT mode transition lottery not only by switching the number of bets in the non-internal state or the internal state, but also by causing a transition to the first BB state or the second BB state. In particular, in the first BB state or the second BB state, the medal reduction per game is suppressed compared to the 3-bet game or the 2-bet game in the internal state (see FIG. 26), and by transitioning to the first BB state or the second BB state, it is possible to execute a game that generates a specific opportunity while restricting the mode transition of the AT mode transition lottery, while suppressing the reduction of medals held. Therefore, the processing for the presentation of the game using the transition of each BB state, etc. will be described below.

<BB notification first process>
First, the first BB notification process in the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. As already explained, the first notification process for BB (start effect setting process) is the effect setting based on the start command (lottery result command, AT winning notification command, trigger non-winning command, etc.) that is output at the start of the game. This is a process that performs

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the first BB has been won based on the lottery result command currently received. If the first BB is won, a process of setting a first BB winning flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2102. Then, in step S2103, it is determined whether the first BB completed flag or the second BB completed flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The 1st BB completed flag and the 2nd BB completed flag indicate that although the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state have already ended, the CPU 181 understands that the production corresponding to the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state is continuing. This is a flag for The processing when these BB completed flags are set will be explained in detail after explaining the effects corresponding to each BB state, but here, we will explain the processing when none of the BB completed flags are set. The processing in this case will be explained.

In other words, if a negative judgment is made in step S2103 and none of the BB completed flags are set, then in step S2104, effect settings are executed to perform a 1st BB winning effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. The 1st BB winning effect is an effect for informing the player that he or she has won the 1st BB in the current game, and for example, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays that a tank has been acquired as the 1st BB corresponding character associated with the 1st BB (the figure shows a tank jumping out of a treasure chest).

If it is determined in step S2101 that the first BB has not been won, the process advances to step S2105. In step S2105, it is determined whether or not the second BB has been won based on the lottery result command currently received. If the second BB is won, a process of setting a second BB winning flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2106. Then, in step S2107, it is determined whether the first BB completed flag or the second BB completed flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. If a negative determination is made in step S2107 and none of the BB completed flags are set, then in step S2108, performance settings for performing the second BB winning performance on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are executed. The 2nd BB winning performance is a performance to inform the player that he has won the 2nd BB in this game, and for example, as shown in FIG. It is displayed that a sword as a second BB compatible character associated with 2BB has been acquired (the figure shows the sword jumping out of the treasure box).

If it is determined in step S2105 that the second BB has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2109. In step S2109, it is determined whether or not the first BB winning flag is set. If the first BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2110, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is a three-bet game. Here, the first BB winning flag is a flag that is cleared based on the first BB winning, and when the first BB winning flag is set and the game is a three-bet game, this means that the internal state in which the first BB win is carried over is being executed in a three-bet game. In this case, in step S2111, the effect setting is executed to perform the first BB winning effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. The 1st BB won effect is an effect to inform the player that the 1st BB win has been carried over and that a 1st BB win may occur in the current game. For example, as shown in FIG. 57(a), a tank is displayed as the 1st BB corresponding character in a predetermined position (left edge) on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65.

If the first BB winning flag is not set in step S2109, it is determined in step S2112 whether the second BB winning flag is set. If the second BB winning flag is set, the process advances to step S2113, and it is determined whether the game to be started this time is a 2-bet game. Here, the 2nd BB winning flag is a flag that is cleared based on the 2nd BB winning, but if the 2nd BB winning flag is set and it is a 2 bet game, the 2nd BB winning is carried over. This means that the internal state is executed in a 2-bet game. In this case, in step S2114, effect settings for performing the second BB winning effect on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are executed. The 2nd BB winning effect is an effect to inform the player that the 2nd BB winning has been carried over and it is possible to win the 2nd BB prize in this game.For example, as shown in FIG. 57(b) As shown, the sword as the second BB corresponding character is displayed at a predetermined position (left end) on the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65.

<BB notification second process>
Processing for executing effects corresponding to the first BB state and the second BB state is executed in the second BB notification process. Therefore, before explaining the processing in the case where the effects corresponding to each of these BB states are being continued in the first BB notification process, the second BB notification process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55. . As already explained, the second BB notification process is a process executed in the all-stop production setting process, and includes the start commands (winning result command, 1st BB start command, 2nd BB start command, etc.) that are output when the game ends. This is a process for setting effects based on a start command, a first BB end command, a second BB end command, an AT end command, an advantageous section game command, a lottery trigger command, etc.

In the second BB notification process, it is determined in step S2201 whether the first BB start command has been received. If the first BB start command has been received, in step S2202, the effect settings for starting the first BB effect on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are executed, and then the second BB notification process is ended. do. The first BB presentation is a presentation for notifying the player that the player is in the first BB state and that the execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted. For example, as shown in FIG. 58(a), , the main character riding a tank is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65 as the first BB character associated with the first BB corresponding character. In addition, when performing the 1st BB production, a mode transition restriction notification production with characters such as "HOLD!!" is used to notify the user of the restricted state, and a medal reduction suppression production with text displays such as "Conserving physical strength" is performed. By doing this, it is notified that the decrease in medals has been suppressed. Note that the first BB presentation continues at least until a process for ending the first BB presentation is executed. Then, when the number of advantageous section games AG becomes 50 during the first BB state and a lottery trigger command is received, a standby effect will occur as shown in FIG. 59(a) (step S1909).

If the first BB start command has not been received in step S2201, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the second BB start command has been received. If the second BB start command has been received, in step S2204, the effect setting for starting the second BB effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed, and then the second BB notification process is terminated. The second BB effect is an effect for notifying the player that the second BB state is in a state in which the execution of the process related to the instruction function is restricted. For example, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the main character is displayed equipped with a sword as the second BB character associated with the second BB corresponding character on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, when the second BB effect is executed, a notification of the restricted state is made by a mode transition restriction notification effect with a character display such as "HOLD!!", and a medal reduction suppression effect with a character display such as "stamina conservation" is performed to notify the player that the medal reduction is suppressed. The second BB effect continues at least until the process for terminating the second BB effect is executed. If the number of games in the advantageous zone AG reaches 50 during the second BB state and a lottery trigger command is received, a standby effect will occur as shown in FIG. 59(b) (step S1909).

If it is determined in step S2203 that the second BB start command has not been received, then in step S2205 it is determined whether or not the first BB end command has been received. If the first BB end command has been received, then in step S2206 a process is executed to set a first BB end flag. Then, in step S2207 a process is executed to input "3" as the first predetermined number into the end counter provided in the various counter area 183b, and then this BB notification second process is terminated. In this embodiment, the first BB effect and the second BB effect are configured to continue until a game after the corresponding BB end game, and the end counter is a counter that specifies the maximum number of games that the ongoing BB effect will continue even after the BB end game.

If it is determined in step S2205 that the first BB end command has not been received, then in step S2208 it is determined whether or not the second BB end command has been received. If the second BB end command has been received, then in step S2209 a process is executed to set a second BB end flag. Then, in step S2210 a process is executed to input "5" as the second predetermined number into the end counter, and then this BB notification second process is terminated. Note that in this embodiment, the second predetermined number is a number different from the first predetermined number and is a number greater than the first predetermined number, but it may be a number less than the first predetermined number or the same as the first predetermined number. If a negative determination is made in step S2208, then the BB notification second process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the first BB notification process, if it is determined that the first BB is won in step S2101 and the first BB completed flag and the second BB completed flag are set in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2115. move on. In step S2115, processing for ending the BB production that is currently being executed is executed. That is, if the first BB presentation is being executed, the first BB presentation is ended, and if the second BB presentation is being executed, the second BB presentation is ended. In addition, when the BB performance ends, the counter is also reset to 0 after the end. In other words, each BB performance can continue until the next first BB win after the BB state ends.

Also, if the second BB is won in step S2105 and it is determined in step S2107 that the first BB completed flag or the second BB completed flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2116. In step S2116, similar to step S2115 above, the process of ending the BB performance currently in progress is executed. That is, if a first BB performance is currently in progress, the first BB performance is ended, and if a second BB performance is currently in progress, the second BB performance is ended. Note that when the process of ending the BB performance is executed, the post-end counter is also reset to 0. That is, each BB performance can continue after the BB state ends until the next second BB is won.

After executing any of the processes in step S2104, step S2108, step S2111, and steps S2114 to S2116, or after making a negative determination in step S2110, step S2112, or step S2113, the process advances to step S2117. In step S2117, it is determined whether any BB performance is currently being executed. If any of the BB effects is being executed, in step S2118, it is determined whether the first BB completed flag or the second BB completed flag is set, and whether the BB state has already ended or not is determined. Determine whether or not. If any of the BB completion flags is set, a process of decrementing the post-completion counter by 1 is executed in step S2119.

Then, in step S2120, it is determined whether the counter has reached 0 after the end, and if it has reached 0, in step S2121, the end process for the BB performance being executed is executed, and then the first BB notification process is terminated. That is, if the first BB performance is being executed, the first BB performance is terminated, and if the second BB performance is being executed, the second BB performance is terminated. Also, even if the counter is not 0 after the end, if an AT winning notification command or a trigger non-winning command is received in step S2122 and a lottery for transitioning to the AT mode based on a specific trigger is executed, the process proceeds to step S2121, the end process for the BB performance being executed is executed, and then the first BB notification process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2117, step S2118, or step S2122, the first BB notification process is terminated as is.

In other words, each BB performance ends when a lottery for transition to AT mode based on a specific trigger is executed after the BB state ends, and even if a lottery for transition to AT mode based on a specific trigger is not executed, it ends when the next BB is won or the counter becomes 0 after the end.

<Relationship between each BB state and AT mode transition lottery>
The relationship between the playability and performance that generates a specific opportunity while restricting the transition to the lottery mode by transitioning to each BB state will be explained with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 60 and 61.

For example, if you play a 3-bet game with an internal state in which the 2nd BB win is carried over, and at timing t21 the game moves to an advantageous section and the counting of the number of games up to a specific opportunity starts, then at timing t22 you can enter the lottery mode. Suppose that the mode has shifted to the second mode. Thereafter, for example, by using a special notification to ascertain the mode transition, the 3-bet game is switched to the 2-bet game at timing t23. Then, after a specific opportunity occurs at timing t24, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is executed by switching to a 3-bet game at timing t25. In this case, if the internal state is played in a 3-bet game, a reduction of approximately 1.77 coins per game is expected, and if the internal state is played in a 2-bet game, a reduction of approximately 0.64 coins per game is expected. It turns out. That is, in the games from t21 to t23, the number of medals decreases by about 1.77 per game, and in the games from t23 to t24, the number of medals decreases by about 0.64 per game.

In contrast, suppose that the game enters the favorable zone at time t26, the count of the number of games until the specific trigger is started, and the lottery mode transitions to the second mode at time t27. Then, the game switches to a 2-bet game at time t28, and the second BB win occurs at time t29. In this case, the second BB state from t29 to t31 is played in a 3-bet game, but since no mode transition occurs, the second mode is maintained. Meanwhile, the count of the number of games until the specific trigger continues, and the specific trigger occurs at time t30. After the second BB state ends at time t31, the game switches to a 3-bet game and the AT mode transition lottery is held, making it possible to enjoy the benefits of the second mode.

Here, as described above, when the internal state is set to a 3-bet game, a decrease of about 1.77 medals per game is expected, and when the internal state is set to a 2-bet game, a decrease of about 0.64 medals per game is expected, whereas in the second BB state, a decrease of about 0.00 medals per game is expected, and medal decrease (increase) is unlikely to occur. In this case, the game from t26 to t28 is the same as the case from t21 to t23 in that about 1.77 medals are decreased per game, but the game from t28 to t29 is a decrease of about 0.64 medals per game, and the game from t29 to t31 is not decreased. In other words, the number of games until the specific opportunity is allocated to the internal state and the 2-bet game is reduced by the amount that causes the second BB winning, and the number of medal decreases can be overwhelmingly reduced. By doing this, when playing a game that creates a specific opportunity in a restricted state, the player is not only able to switch the number of bets, but also has the added ability to win a bonus, making the game much more interesting.

Then, when switching to the 2-bet game at timing t28, since the 2nd BB winning has already been carried over, as shown in FIG. executed. Therefore, the player can easily understand that it is possible to immediately win the second BB prize, that is, it is possible to wait until a specific opportunity occurs while suppressing the decrease in the number of medals held.

When the second BB is won at t29, the second BB presentation starts. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the mode transition restriction notification presentation and medal reduction suppression presentation are also executed, and the player can understand that this is more advantageous than continuing the internal state of the two-bet game. As the game progresses, the game count notification presentation is also updated, and when a specific opportunity occurs at t30, the above-mentioned waiting presentation such as "Defeat the enemy with a MAX BET!!" occurs, and it is announced that it is now possible to take part in the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity after the second BB state ends.

As already explained, in this embodiment, in a 3-bet game, it is possible to win the first BB, but not the second BB, and in a 2-bet game, it is possible to win the second BB, but the second BB cannot be won. It is now impossible to win 1BB. In a 3-bet game, it is possible to win the 1st BB, but not the 2nd BB, and in a 2-bet game, it is possible to win the 2nd BB, but not to win the 1st BB. It has become. In other words, if you play a 3-bet game with an internal state in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the 2nd BB winning will not occur, and by switching to the 2-bet game, it is possible to make the carried over 2nd BB winning. becomes. In this case, if the non-internal state after the end of the second BB state is played in a 3-bet game, it becomes possible to win the first BB, and it becomes possible to win the first BB prize.

For example, as shown in FIG. 61, in a case where the count of the number of games until a specific opportunity occurs after transitioning to the advantageous section at timing t41 is started, the 1st BB winning is achieved at timing t42, which is the first mode. Suppose you let it happen. In this case, as mentioned above, the lottery mode does not shift during the first BB state, but the number of games up to a specific opportunity is counted, so for example, at timing t43 during the first BB state, a specific opportunity occurs. can occur. Then, when the first BB state ends at timing t44 and an AT mode transition lottery is executed based on a specific opportunity in a 3-bet game, the AT mode transition lottery will be in the first mode on the low probability side as described above. There is a low possibility of winning the transition to AT mode.

In other words, in the internal state where the 1st BB winning is carried over, there is a possibility that the 1st BB winning will occur unintentionally before shifting to the 1st mode in a 3-bet game, and if this happens, the There is a high possibility that the AT mode transition lottery will be a lottery in the first mode on the low probability side. Therefore, in the internal state where the 1st BB winning is carried over, while determining the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery, before shifting to the 2nd mode, you are forced to play to avoid the 1st BB winning every game. become.

In this embodiment, when the first credit insertion switch 56 serving as the MAX BET button is operated, a bet number according to the value of the MAX bet counter is placed, and the MAX bet counter is set to 2 in the non-internal state, and 3 when the internal state is entered. In other words, when the first BB state or the second BB state ends and the non-internal state is entered, the MAX bet counter becomes 2, and when a game is played by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the non-internal state naturally becomes a 2-bet game, and the game is played in a restricted state in which the execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted.

That is, at time t44, the MAX bet counter is 2, which means that a 3-bet game has been played by inserting three medals into the medal insertion slot 45 in the figure. Then, at time t45, the 1st BB is won, and the MAX bet counter is set to 3.

In the case where the game shifts to the advantageous section at timing t46 and shifts to the second mode at timing t47, it is assumed that the game switches to a 2-bet game at timing t48 and the second BB win is established at timing t49. In these situations, the MAX bet counter is 3 in the internal state until the second BB winning is established at timing t48, and when playing a game that switches to a 2-bet game at timing t48, the first credit input switch 56 Instead, it is necessary to operate the second credit input switch 57 or insert medals from the medal slot 45 to place a bet. Since the MAX bet counter is 3 even in the second BB state, in the second BB state from t49 to t51, by operating the first credit input switch 56, the desired game (game based on the limit state) can be played. is possible.

After a specific trigger occurs at timing t50, when the second BB state ends at timing t51, the state becomes a non-internal state. In this case, since the MAX bet counter becomes 2, in the game in which the first credit input switch 56 is operated, the 2-bet game continues. In a 2-bet game in the non-internal state, the 2nd BB will be won with a relatively high probability of about 1/4.95, and if the 2nd BB is not won in the winning game, the internal state will occur. When the internal state is reached, the MAX bet counter becomes 3, and in a game in which the first credit input switch 56 is operated, the game switches to the 3-bet game when the game shifts to the internal state at t52, and an AT mode transition lottery is executed based on a specific opportunity. will be done.

In other words, in this embodiment, the second mode with high probability is maintained as the lottery mode for AT mode transition lottery, and the game that generates a specific opportunity is switched from a 3-bet game to a 2-bet game while suppressing the decrease in medals. This is realized by establishing a second BB prize by winning the second BB, and after the second BB state ends, the restriction state is encouraged to be maintained until the second BB is won again. By doing this, the internal state in which the first BB win is carried over becomes less likely to be executed in a 3-bet game. As a result, in order to prevent the occurrence of an event in which an unintentional 1st BB prize is established and the player is entered into the AT mode transition lottery in the 1st mode on the low probability side, the 1st BB prize is It becomes possible to suitably avoid forcing the player to avoid playing a game every game, and it becomes possible to realize a smoother game without putting the player at a disadvantage.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when playing a 2-bet game in the non-internal state after the second BB state, the performance during the second BB state is configured to continue until the internal state is reached. In other words, the second BB performance that is started at the timing t49 when the second BB state is transferred does not end at the timing t51 when the second BB state ends, but can continue until the timing t52 when the internal state is entered. By doing this, even though the specific opportunity has already occurred and it is possible to receive the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity as long as you switch to the 3-bet game, it is possible to switch to the 3-bet game. It becomes possible to reduce the sense of discomfort caused by playing a game in a 2-bet game.

On the other hand, for example, when the playing time is limited, such as when a game hall is about to close, there are times when the time and medals required for playing the 2-bet game after the second BB state ends until the internal state is reached is regrettable. It can be assumed. In this regard, in this embodiment, since it is possible to bet not only by the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57 but also by the medal insertion slot 45, after the second BB state ends, the internal state is entered. It is also possible to switch to the 3-bet game immediately after the second BB state ends without playing the 2-bet game up to this point, and to receive the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity (FIG. 60). By doing so, it becomes possible to have the player play the game while respecting his or her will.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

Allowable games (first games, non-internal state or 3-bet game in internal state) that may cause a lottery mode transition in the AT mode transition lottery and restricted games (second games, BB state games, non-internal state or 2-bet game in internal state) that restrict the lottery mode transition in the AT mode transition lottery are set, and the AT mode transition lottery is held when the number of advantageous zone games AG, which is counted in either the allowable games or restricted games, reaches a predetermined number of 50. In this way, it is possible to realize a game feature that avoids a lottery mode transition by switching to restricted games after the lottery mode is transitioned to the high probability side in the allowable games, until the number of advantageous zone games AG reaches a predetermined number, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this case, since not only the transition of the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery but also the AT mode transition lottery itself is restricted by restricted play, the AT mode transition lottery is performed by playing permissible play after the number of games in the advantageous zone AG reaches a predetermined number. By doing this, not only does it have to determine the second mode and switch to restricted play, but it also has to play while knowing that the number of games in the advantageous zone AG has reached a predetermined number, i.e., it is necessary to know the timing to switch from restricted play to permissible play, improving the playability of restricted play.

In this embodiment, the player can easily know that the predetermined number has been reached by the lottery preview effect and standby effect displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, the game number notification effect allows the player to know that the predetermined number has been reached and the number of games remaining until the predetermined number is reached. In this way, it is possible to play while knowing how long it will take for a specific opportunity to occur, and not only can the player know whether or not a BB has been won and the timing for switching to a 2-bet game, but also the time limit if the transition to the second mode has not occurred, making the game more interesting.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the first permitted game after a specific opportunity occurs, the AT mode transition lottery will be performed in the restricted game when a specific opportunity occurs. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the AT mode transition lottery is not carried out for a long time after switching to the permissible game after a specific opportunity occurs, and the lottery mode is shifted. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize a gaming feature in which the occurrence of a specific opportunity is determined and the game is switched to an allowed game.

Furthermore, a special notification is issued by winning the special notification lottery, and the probability of winning the special notification lottery is higher when the player is in the second mode than when the player is in the first mode, so that the special notification can be perceived as an indication that the player is in the second mode. This allows the player to use the special notification as an indicator to switch from permitted play to restricted play.

The special notification lottery is set so that the larger the value of the opportunity through counter indicating the number of consecutive times that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won, the easier it is to win. Notifications are more likely to occur. In other words, it becomes easier to determine that the player is staying in the second mode, and as a result, it becomes easier to win the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity. By doing so, it is possible to realize the ceiling function of the AT mode transition lottery using the special notification.

In this case, the special notification can be considered not as notification of staying in the second mode but also as notification corresponding to the number of bets. In other words, it is not a direct notification of the level of the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery, but it can be interpreted as a suggestion of the type of game to be executed (restricted game and permissible game). Thereby, the player can also grasp the game to be executed from the special notification.

If the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger is not won, the advantageous zone is ended, and at the end of the advantageous zone, the main control unit 101 performs initialization processing for the advantageous zone information. In contrast, the trigger through counter that determines the probability of the execution of the special notification is managed by the display control unit 81, so it is possible to adjust the likelihood of winning the AT mode transition lottery across advantageous zones through special notifications.

The probability of winning the special notification lottery varies depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process, so even if there are circumstances that make it impossible to set a different winning probability for the AT mode transition lottery, this can be achieved through the special notification.

In this case, the special notification is set to be executed as an all-stop effect in the all-stop effect setting process, and is executed when the game ends. On the other hand, the process for transitioning to the lottery mode, such as the lottery process for transitioning to the AT lottery mode, is executed in the lottery result corresponding process on the main controller 101 side. Processing for mode transition is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game has been switched to the limited game using the special notification as an indicator, but the game has been shifted to the lottery mode.

The AT lottery mode transition lottery process allows a transition to the first mode or the second mode to occur depending on the lottery result of the game, so a specific opportunity is generated in a restricted game to increase the probability In the game where the player aims to receive the AT mode transition lottery in the second mode of the game, the lottery results of each game are not neglected, and a decrease in the attention level of each game can be avoided.

In this case, while it is assumed that a transition from the first mode to the second mode is likely to occur when a specific role, known as a rare role, occurs, and that a transition from the second mode to the first mode is likely to occur when a normal role, known as a normal lip A to normal lip C, occurs, it is possible for the normal role to also cause a transition from the first mode to the second mode. Therefore, it is not possible to definitively determine the mode transition from the lottery results of each game alone, and it is possible to increase the fun of the game of predicting the mode transition.

When a specific winning combination is won in an allowed game, an AT mode transition lottery can be held based on the specific opportunity, so an AT mode transition can occur without going through an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity. As a result, the variety of games will be diversified. Moreover, by doing this, it is possible to enter the second mode while receiving the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific combination in the permitted game, rather than playing only limited games and receiving the AT mode transition lottery based on specific opportunities. A game that waits for the transition to the AT mode is more likely to occur, and it becomes possible to motivate the player to play the game in the permitted game.

Moreover, in restricted play as a two-bet game, it is possible to win a specific role, but the execution of the AT mode transition lottery based on the winning of that specific role is restricted, so the frustration of not being able to execute the AT mode transition lottery despite winning a specific role can be an encouragement to play permitted games.

The game base, which is the average value per game of the subtraction of the number of medals required for the game and the number of medals paid out as a result of the game, will be higher in a 2-bet game as a restricted game than in a 3-bet game as an allowed game. Therefore, by switching to the 2-bet game after determining the transition to the second mode, it is possible to generate a specific opportunity while relatively suppressing the loss of medals. In other words, the sooner the transition to the second mode occurs, and the sooner the transition to the second mode is determined, the fewer medals will be required to generate a specific opportunity, so the transition to the second mode will occur. The degree of attention to the game will be dramatically increased, and it will be possible to realize an interesting gameplay in balance with the actual loss of medals.

Also, if a transition to the first BB state or the second BB state is caused as a limited game, the game base for these BB states is set higher than that of a two-bet game, so fewer medals are required to reach the specific trigger than if the specific trigger were to occur while remaining in the two-bet game. In other words, by causing the transition to the second mode earlier, identifying this earlier, and further causing the second BB win or the first BB win earlier, it is possible to reduce the medal loss required to reach the specific trigger. Thus, in addition to improving gameplay by creating room for knowledge intervention, such as determining the transition to the second mode, gameplay is also improved by creating room for the player's technical intervention, such as achieving a BB win, making it possible to realize a game that is more interesting than ever before.

Moreover, it is not enough to make a BB win indiscriminately, but it is necessary to determine the BB win timing, since there may be cases where no specific opportunity has occurred depending on the BB win timing or the end timing of the BB state. More specifically, if the BB winning timing is too early, you will need to play another 2-bet game after the BB state ends, and if the BB winning timing is too late, the BB state will continue even after a specific opportunity occurs. There is a concern that time efficiency will decrease.

In this case, if the internal state is in an advantageous section, the number of games AG in the advantageous section is counted. Therefore, in the internal state where the BB winning is carried over, the timing at which the BB winning should be established is determined, and the desired timing is reached. When the player wins a BB prize, the player can play a game that results in a BB win. In other words, if you wait for the BB win at the desired timing and then try to make the BB win, the gap between the desired timing and the BB win may become large. On that point, as mentioned above, since the game is designed to allow you to wait for a specific opportunity to occur in the internal state, it is possible to generate a BB prize earlier, and it is possible to avoid any inconvenience caused by a lag in the winning timing (particularly in terms of time efficiency). This makes it possible to avoid a decrease in

In this embodiment, the 3 bet game in which the 2nd BB win is carried over is basically set as normal play, and since the 2nd BB can be won in a 2 bet game but not in a 3 bet game, in order to play limited play while minimizing the loss of medals by winning the BB, it is necessary to switch to a 2 bet game. In this way, it is possible to avoid an incident in which the 2nd BB win is unintentionally achieved during normal play in a 3 bet game, resulting in limited play.

In this case, since the configuration is such that the MAX bet counter is set to 2 in the non-internal state and 3 in the internal state, when the MAX bet counter is set to 2 in the non-internal state and 3 in the internal state, in a game where the first credit input switch 56 is operated, after the BB state ends, the MAX bet counter becomes the non-internal state. , the game is automatically played as a 2-bet game, and when the second BB is won in the 2-bet game, an internal state is established and the game is switched to a 3-bet game. By doing this, it becomes easier to play the normal game of the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, and for example, it becomes difficult to play a game in a state where the 1st BB winning is carried over. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being forced to perform a stop operation to avoid winning the first BB prize in a permissible game, and it is possible to smoothly proceed with the game.

On the other hand, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, it is possible to play a 2-bet game by operating the second credit insertion switch 57 instead of the first credit insertion switch 56 or inserting a medal from the medal insertion slot 45, and when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, it is possible to play a 3-bet game by inserting a medal from the medal insertion slot 45 instead of the first credit insertion switch 56. Therefore, for example, it is permitted to play a 3-bet game after the BB state ends, such as when the game hall is about to close, and before the second BB is won. In this way, it is possible to play a game in which the second BB win is carried over, without eliminating the thrill of playing the slot machine 10, which is to start the game by the player's own start operation and end the game by the player's own end operation.

As described above, after the BB state ends, it is easy to play the 2-bet game until the second BB is won, and the BB presentation is also configured to continue until the second BB is won. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity of being encouraged to play in a non-internal state with the 2-bet game even though the BB state has ended.

However, as mentioned above, it is anticipated that there may be a need from players to switch to the 3-bet game after the BB state ends and before winning the second BB, such as when the game hall is about to close, and to take the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity. Since the BB performance ends when the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is executed after the BB state ends, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of only the BB performance continuing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the second BB is not won after the BB state ends, the BB performance is ended after a predetermined number of games (3 or 5 games). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of continuing the BB performance endlessly even if the player does not win the second BB. By the way, after the end of the 2nd BB state, the number of games in which the 2nd BB production can continue is set as a number larger than the denominator of the winning probability of the 2nd BB (approximately 1/4.95), and basically The second BB production ends based on the second BB winning.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment described above, the first mode and the second mode are switched back and forth through an AT lottery mode transition lottery process, but in this modified example, the first mode and the second mode are switched back and forth depending on the number of games in the advantageous zone AG.

FIG. 62(a) is a flowchart showing the advantageous section transition game process in this modification. As already explained, the advantageous section transition game process is executed as a process on the main control device 101 side in a game that transitions to an advantageous section in the first section display process.

In step S2301, a lottery process for the mode transition table is executed. That is, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 63(a), a plurality of types of mode transition tables in which the relationship between the advantageous zone game number AG and the transition games between the first mode and the second mode is set are stored in the various table storage area 105a. More specifically, for example, the mode transition table of the address information M0001 indicates that if the advantageous zone game number AG is 1 to 10, the second mode is set, and if the advantageous zone game number AG is 11 to 49, the first mode is set. Also, the mode transition table of the address information M0005 indicates that if the advantageous zone game number AG is 1 to 40, the second mode is set, and if the advantageous zone game number is 41 to 49, the first mode is set. The process of step S2301 is a process of determining by lottery the mode transition table to be used in the current advantageous zone from the plurality of mode transition tables stored.

In more detail, each mode transition table is set so that no matter which advantageous section game number AG there is, there will be cases where the mode is the first mode and cases where the mode is the second mode. It is set. In other words, it is set so that the type of lottery mode is not determined only by the number of games in the advantageous section AG. In addition, the mode transition table in this modification is set to include at least a section that is the second mode, and the mode transition table is set such that the mode is the first mode regardless of the value of the number of games in the advantageous section AG. Not yet. On the other hand, in the mode transition table of the address information MXXX, the number of advantageous section games AG is set to the second mode with all values from 1 to 49, and the mode transition table does not include the section that is the first mode. It becomes.

In step S2302, based on the processing result of step S2301, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined mode transition table in the address information storage area 106f. Thereafter, in step S2303, a process is executed to set the table command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the advantageous section transition game process is ended. The table command includes information on the type of mode transition table set for transition to the current advantageous section.

In the display control device 81, for example, as a table notification process (FIG. 62(b)) executed in step S1615 (other start effect setting process) in the start effect setting process, when a table command is received, Processing is set.

That is, in the table notification process, it is determined in step S2311 whether or not a table command has been received, and if a table command has been received, the information of the mode transition table included in the table command is transmitted in step S2312. The process of storing the address information in the address information storage area 183c is executed. Note that if mode transition table information is already stored, that information is deleted and then new mode transition table information is stored. In step S2311, if a table command has not been received, the table notification process is immediately ended.

After executing the process of step S2312, in step S2313, it is determined whether the trigger through counter is greater than a predetermined number (5). If it is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the table notification process is terminated. If it is greater than the predetermined number, that is, if the number of consecutive times that the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger has not been won is greater than the predetermined number, the table notification lottery process is executed in step S2314. The table notification lottery process is a process of drawing lots to determine whether or not to notify information on the type of mode transition table this time, and the probability of winning varies depending on, for example, the value of the trigger through counter, the setting value, and the type of mode transition table. More specifically, for example, the larger the value of the trigger through counter, the easier it is to win the table notification lottery, and the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win the table notification lottery. And, for example, the type of mode transition table, the longer the section that is the second mode is secured, the easier it is to win the table notification lottery.

After executing the table notification lottery process in step S2314, it is determined in step S2315 whether or not the notification lottery has been won, and if it has not been won, the table notification process is directly ended. If it is a win, in step S2316, the stored mode transition table is read out, and processing is executed to acquire effect data corresponding to the mode transition table from the RAM 183. As shown in FIG. 63, the performance data corresponding to the mode transition table is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the mode transition table, and the performance corresponding to each performance data is set by the player. Different enough to be discernible. Note that instead of the configuration in which mode transition tables and production data are associated one-to-one, a configuration in which a plurality of mode transition tables and one production data are associated, or one mode transition A configuration may be adopted in which a table and a plurality of pieces of performance data are associated with each other.

After acquiring the effect data in step S2316, in step S2317, effect settings for executing table notification effect based on the acquired effect data on the auxiliary display section 65 and speaker 64 are performed, and then table notification is performed. end the process. As the table notification effect, for example, one table notification effect is performed based on a combination of the color and type of the background of the auxiliary display section 65, the position where the main character is displayed, and the size where the main character is displayed. For example, when the background color of the auxiliary display section 65 is blue, the display position of the main character is in the center, and the display size of the main character is in the middle, a table notification corresponding to the mode transition table of address information M0001 is displayed. Even if the background color and main character position are the same, if the display size of the main character is large, the table notification effect corresponding to the mode transition table of address information M0002 will be used, and the same background color and main character position will be used. Even if the display size of the main character is small even in the position of A corresponding table notification effect is configured. In this case, the player can predict the mode transition table set at the time of transition to the advantageous section based on the table notification effect.

In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the performance mode of the table notification performance is set in a one-to-one relationship with each mode transition table and one mode transition table can be specified from the table notification performance, multiple mode transition tables may be set. The presentation mode of one table notification presentation is associated with the table notification presentation, and the configuration may be such that it is difficult to identify one mode transition table from the table notification presentation. In this case, for example, each mode transition table may be classified according to the number of games allocated to the second mode, the timing of the game in the second mode, etc., and a table notification effect may be associated with each classification.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery process in this modification. As already explained, the AT lottery process is a process executed in the lottery result corresponding process, and is allowed to be executed when the number of bets is a specified specified number, and is not executed if the number of bets is not the specified specified number. This is a process that is restricted.

In step S2401, by reading the address information of the mode transition table stored in the address information storage area 106f, processing is executed to understand the mode transition table set in the current advantageous section. In the following step S2402, processing is executed to grasp the number of games in the advantageous section AG. Then, in step S2403, it is determined whether the current game is a game corresponding to the first mode by comparing the mode transition table and the number of advantageous section games AG.

For example, if the mode transition table is for address information M0001, the second mode is set when the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 1 to 10, and the first mode is set when the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 11 to 49, as described above. However, in step S2403, if the number of advantageous section games AG is 11 to 49, an affirmative determination is made that the current game corresponds to the first mode.

If it is determined in step S2403 that the game corresponds to the first mode, it is determined in step S2404 whether or not the first mode flag has already been set. If the first mode flag is not set and the previous AT lottery process was executed in the second mode, a process of setting the first mode flag is executed in step S2405. Then, in step S2406, a process of setting the first mode transition command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403, it is determined in step S2407 whether or not the game corresponds to the second mode. That is, when the mode transition table is of address information M0001 and the number of advantageous section games AG is 1 to 10, an affirmative determination is made that the current game corresponds to the second mode.

If it is determined in step S2407 that the game corresponds to the second mode, it is determined in step S2408 whether or not the first mode flag is set. If the first mode flag is set and the previous AT lottery process was executed in the first mode, a process to clear the first mode flag is executed in step S2409. Then, in step S2410, a process of setting the second mode transition command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2404, if the processing of step S2406 or step S2410 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2407 or step S2408, the process proceeds to step S2411. In steps S2411 to S2416, processing for the AT mode transition lottery is executed similarly to the processing of steps S812 to S817 above. In addition, in steps S2417 to S2424, processing according to the result of the AT mode transition lottery is executed similarly to the processing of steps S818 to S824.

Here, as shown in FIG. 63, the mode transition table does not prescribe a lottery mode when the advantageous zone game count AG is 50 or more. In other words, if the advantageous zone game count AG is 50 or more, a negative judgment will be made in both step S2403 and step S2407. In this way, after the advantageous zone game count AG reaches 50 and a specific trigger occurs, regardless of the value of the advantageous zone game count AG thereafter, a transition to the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery will not occur.

By doing this, when playing with a bet based on a specific specified number, the game will switch between the first mode and the second mode depending on the value of the advantageous zone game number AG, whereas when playing with a bet other than the specific specified number, the game will not switch between the first mode and the second mode regardless of the value of the advantageous zone game number AG.

More specifically, for example, when the mode transition table of address information M0001 is set, the second mode is set for games in which the advantageous zone game count AG is up to 10, and the first mode is set for games in which the advantageous zone game count AG is 11 or more. However, by switching from a 3-bet game to a 2-bet game for games in which the advantageous zone game count AG is up to 10, and playing in a restricted state, it is possible to continue playing while maintaining the second mode. Then, after the advantageous zone game count reaches 50 and the trigger lottery flag is set, it is possible to receive an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger in the second mode by switching to a 3-bet game.

As described above, in this modification, the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery is set using the mode transition table and the number of advantageous zone games From the number AG, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to know this in advance. In other words, in the first embodiment, since the lottery mode is configured to shift after the AT lottery mode transition lottery process in the permitted game, the lottery mode transition is specified until the AT lottery mode transition lottery process is performed. Although it is not possible to do so, by doing as in the above modification, it is possible to know the lottery mode in advance. Moreover, even if the lottery mode does not actually shift in the permitted game, it is possible to know which lottery mode would be selected if the permitted game were to occur in the restricted game. It is also possible to realize a game in which the user determines the timing to switch to a 3-bet game, such as when switching to a 2-bet game, despite the current mode.

As the mode transition table, a plurality of mode transition tables are stored in advance, and these plurality of mode transition tables are set so that the mode in which the player is staying cannot be determined from the advantageous zone game number AG. More specifically, for example, if the number of games after the advantageous zone transition (advantageous zone game number AG) is 1 game to 10 games, the mode transition table of address information M0001 sets the player to the second mode, but the mode transition table of address information M0002 sets the player to the first mode, and if the number of games is 11 games to 20 games, the mode transition table of address information M0001 sets the player to the first mode, and the mode transition table of address information M0002 sets the player to the second mode. In this way, a mode transition table is set to each lottery mode for each game number so that the lottery mode in which the player is staying cannot be determined only from the number of games after the advantageous zone transition. In this way, the significance of playing a game that predicts the mode transition table is guaranteed.

On the other hand, when transitioning to an advantageous section, that is, when setting a mode transition table, a table notification effect that suggests each mode transition table can be performed. It is possible to play a game that predicts the lottery mode in which the player is currently staying and the lottery mode in the future based on the contents of the table notification performance.

In this case, for example, if a performance corresponding to address information M0001 is performed as a table notification performance, after moving to the advantageous section, it is sufficient to play any of the games from the 1st game to the 10th game as an allowed game. For later games, it becomes necessary to play limited games until a specific opportunity occurs. In other words, if it is detected by the 10th game that the mode transition table with address information M0001 has been set from the table notification effect or special notification, the game will be switched to restricted play by the 11th game and the game will be played until the 49th game. By doing so, it becomes possible to receive an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity while maintaining the second mode. In other words, in this case, if the mode transition table cannot be detected by the 10th game, or if any of the games from the 11th game to the 49th game are played in the allowed game, the AT mode based on a specific opportunity The transition lottery has no choice but to be accepted in the first mode on the low probability side. By doing so, the importance of sensing the mode transition table and switching to a restricted game is increased, and the fun of such a game is improved.

Furthermore, for example, when a performance corresponding to address information M0005 is performed as a table notification performance, after the transition to the advantageous section, any game from the 41st game to the 49th game may be played as an allowed game, For the later games, it is possible to play the limited games. In other words, after it is detected from the table notification effect or special notification that the mode transition table of address information M0005 has been set, you can play at least the 48th game in the restricted game, for example, 2 bets. It becomes possible to wait for a specific opportunity and shift to the second mode while suppressing the decrease in medals in the game. In this case, for example, it is possible to further suppress the decrease in medals in limited games by establishing the 2nd BB winning, but for example, if the 2nd BB winning occurs in the 5th game, the 2nd BB state is 44 games. If the game is continued, the ending game in the second BB state will be the 49th game, and it will no longer be possible to play any of the games from the 41st game to the 49th game as an allowed game. In other words, the opportunity to shift to the second mode will be missed. In this case, the timing of winning the 2nd BB prize will become more important, and the number of consecutive games in the 2nd BB state (lottery results of each game in the 2nd BB state) will attract more attention. This will result in a higher level of performance. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

The table notification performance is executed through a table notification lottery, and the table notification lottery is set so that the probability of winning varies depending on the setting value and the value of the trigger through counter. More specifically, the larger the value of the trigger through counter, the easier it is to win the table notification lottery, and the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win the table notification lottery. In this way, the more you miss the AT mode transition lottery, the more likely you are to have an opportunity to receive an AT mode transition lottery in the second mode, and the higher the setting, the more likely you are to have an opportunity to receive an AT mode transition lottery in the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to realize the setting difference in the AT mode transition rate through the table notification performance, and it is also possible to realize the ceiling function for AT mode transition through the table notification performance.

Furthermore, the table notification lottery is set so that the probability of winning varies depending on the type of mode transition table that is set. More specifically, the type of mode transition table is set so that the longer the section in the second mode, for example, the easier it is to win the table notification lottery. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity of a player not realizing that a table with a long section in the second mode has been selected because the player is not notified of this.

<Modification 2>
A modification of the BB state will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), in this modified example, the bonus corresponding to the first to sixth small wins in a two-bet game is different from that in the first embodiment. In this modified example, two medals are paid out in the same number as the number of bets as the bonus corresponding to the first to sixth small wins. Also, as shown in FIG. 65(b), in the lottery table for the first BB state and the second BB state in this modified example, it is set so that the common bell with index value IV=10 has a high probability of winning (100% probability in this modified example).

Figure 66 is a flowchart showing the bonus state processing in this modified example.

The processing of steps S2601 to S2603 is the same as the processing of steps S501 to S503 described above, and when the 1st BB or 2nd BB is won and the internal state is entered, the process of setting the MAX bet counter to 3 is executed. If it is determined in step S2604 that the 1st BB or 2nd BB has been won, in this modified example, the process of setting the MAX bet counter to 2 is executed in step S2605. Then, if it is determined in step S2606 that the 1st BB has been won, in this modified example, the process of inputting 110 to the BB counter is executed in step S2607. After that, the 1st BB win flag is cleared in step S2608, the 1st BB state flag is set in step S2609, the 1st BB start command is set in step S2610, and then the specified number of bets is set to 2 in step S2611 before the bonus state processing is terminated. That is, in this modified example, the first BB state is executed in two bet games and ends when 110 medals are paid out. Also, in the first BB state, the common bell that results in the payout of two medals is always won, so the first BB state takes 55 games to end. In other words, the number of games required to end the first BB state is greater than the number of games required for a specific trigger to occur, and by transitioning to the first BB state, after the end of the first BB state, an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger can always be executed in the lottery mode before the transition to the first BB state.

If it is determined in step S2606 that the first BB winning has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S2612, and a process of inputting 50 to the BB counter is executed. After that, the second BB winning flag is cleared in step S2613, the second BB state flag is set in step S2614, the second BB start command is set in step S2615, and then the bonus state process is terminated after the specified bet number is set to 2 in step S2611. That is, in this modified example, the second BB state is also executed in a 2-bet game, and ends when 50 medals are paid out, which is less than the first BB state. Also, in the second BB state, since the common bell that generates the payout of two medals is always won, the second BB state takes 25 games to end. In other words, the number of games required to end the second BB state is less than the number of games required until a specific trigger occurs, and when the second BB state is transitioned to, after the second BB state ends, an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger can be executed in a lottery mode different from the lottery mode before the transition to the second BB state.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2601, in steps S2616 to S2618, the BB counter is decremented based on the winning of a small winning combination, similar to steps S515 to S517 above. Then, if the BB counter becomes 0 or less, the corresponding BB state flag is cleared in step S2619, the corresponding BB end command is set in step S2620, and the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3 in step S2621, and then the bonus state processing ends. In other words, since the first BB state and the second BB state are performed in a 2-bet game and the MAX bet counter is also configured to be set to 2, in this modified example, the MAX bet counter is not changed (step S519) when transitioning to a non-internal state.

As shown in FIG. 65(c1) and FIG. 65(c2), in the lottery result handling process and winning result handling process in this modification, when the number is not the specified number according to the gaming state, the process related to the instruction function is executed. In the limiting process, it is determined in step S2501 or step S2511 whether or not any BB state flag is set, and if it is a non-internal state or an internal state in which it is not set, the BB state flag is determined in step S2502 or step S2512. It is determined whether or not it is a 3-bet game. If it is a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, the lottery result handling process and winning result handling process are ended without performing any subsequent processing. Furthermore, even if any of the BB status flags is set, it is determined in step S2503 or step S2513 whether or not it is a 3-bet game. If it is a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, the lottery result handling process and winning result handling process are ended without performing any subsequent processing. In other words, 3 is set as the specific regulation number for all of the non-internal state, internal state, and BB state, and in the case of a 3-bet game, the processing (step The configuration is such that the processing after step S604 and the processing after step S1104 are executed.

The process related to the trigger skip counter in this modified example will be described. As already explained, the trigger skip counter is a counter that corresponds to the number of consecutive times that the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger has not been won, and the larger the value of the trigger skip counter, the higher the occurrence rate of the special notification that indicates the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery. Also, in the above modified example 1, the larger the value of the trigger skip counter, the more likely the table notification effect for the mode transition table will occur. In this modified example, the value added to the trigger skip counter when the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is not won is changed depending on the type of state when the specific trigger occurs, including the first BB state and the second BB state that require different numbers of games to be played as described above.

FIG. 67(a) shows the trigger adjustment process in this modification. The trigger adjustment process is executed as a process on the display control device 81 side, for example, in another full-stop performance setting process in the full-stop performance setting process.

In step S2701, it is determined whether a lottery trigger command has been received. If it has not been received, the adjustment process is immediately terminated. If it has been received, the process advances to step S2702, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the first BB state. If it is a specific trigger that occurred during the first BB state, in step S2703, a process of setting the first BB trigger flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and then this adjustment process is ended.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2702, the process proceeds to step S2704, where it is judged whether or not the current game state is the second BB state. If a specific trigger has occurred during the second BB state, the process executes a process of setting a second BB trigger flag in the various flag storage area 183a in step S2705, and then ends this adjustment process.

If a negative determination is made in step S2704, the process advances to step S2706, and it is determined whether or not the current game was executed as a 2-bet game. If it is a specific opportunity generated in a 2-bet game, in step S2707 a process is executed to set a 2-bet opportunity flag in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then this adjustment process is ended. If it is determined in step S2706 that the specific opportunity has occurred in a 3-bet game, the adjustment process is immediately terminated.

Figure 67 (b) is a flowchart showing part of the AT lottery mode notification process in this modified example.

After a negative judgment is made in step S1703 or the processing of step S1704 is executed, similarly to step S1705 described above, it is judged in step S2711 whether or not a trigger non-winning command has been received. If the command has been received and the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger has not been won, it is judged in step S2712 whether or not the above-mentioned first BB trigger flag has been set. If it has been set, the processing of clearing the first BB trigger flag is executed in step S2713.

If the first BB trigger flag is not set in step S2712, it is determined in step S2714 whether the second BB trigger flag is set. If it is set, a process of clearing the second BB trigger flag is executed in step S2715, and a process of adding 1 to the trigger through counter is executed in step S2716.

If the second BB trigger flag is not set in step S2714, it is determined in step S2717 whether or not the 2 bet trigger flag is set. If it is set, the process of clearing the 2 bet opportunity flag is executed in step S2718, and the process of adding 2 to the opportunity through counter is executed in step S2719. If the 2-bet trigger flag is not set in step S2717, a process of adding 3 to the trigger through counter is executed in step S2720.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2711, or after any of the processes in steps S2713, S2716, S2719, and S2720 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1707, where it is determined whether or not an AT winning notification command has been received.

In other words, the case where the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on the specific opportunity that occurred during the second BB state is better than the case where the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on the specific opportunity that occurred during the first BB state. The value added to the opportunity through counter is large when the AT mode transition lottery is not won, 0 is added in the case of the first BB state, and 1 is added in the case of the second BB state. In addition, it is better to enter AT mode based on a specific opportunity that occurred during a 2-bet game than when the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on a specific opportunity that occurred during the 1st BB state or 2nd BB state. A large number of values are added to the trigger through counter when the AT mode transition lottery is not won, and 0 or 1 is added in the case of the 1st BB state or 2nd BB state, and 2 is added in the case of a 2 bet game. be done. Then, the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on a specific opportunity that occurs during a 3-bet game than when the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on a specific opportunity that occurs during a 2-bet game. The value added to the opportunity through counter is large when the game is not won, and in the case of a 2-bet game, 2 is added, and in the case of a 3-bet game, 3 is added.

As mentioned above, by transitioning to the 1st BB state, it is possible to play 55 games while suppressing the decrease in medals, and regardless of the number of games after transitioning to the advantageous section, the transition to the 1st BB state is possible. It is possible to generate a specific opportunity without reducing the number of medals you have. On the other hand, by shifting to the 2nd BB state, it becomes possible to play 25 games while suppressing the decrease in medals, and by causing the 2nd BB winnings when the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 25 or later, the 2nd BB state It becomes possible to generate a specific trigger during a state. In other words, in both the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, it is possible to proceed with counting the number of advantageous zone games AG while restricting mode transitions, but the number of consecutive games is different, and the 1st BB state is better. The number of consecutive games is longer than in the 2nd BB state.

In this case, for example, in a configuration in which the lottery mode is determined by the mode transition table, as in variant 1, an action of giving up on receiving the AT mode transition lottery based on this specific opportunity in the second mode is assumed based on the table notification effect. More specifically, if the table notification effect reveals that a mode transition table that is difficult to transition to the second mode on the high probability side has been selected, or if the table notification effect is not performed and the mode transition table cannot be identified, it is possible to proceed with the game by transitioning to the first BB state while suppressing the loss of medals held until the next mode transition table selection opportunity. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when a specific opportunity occurs during the first BB state, even if the AT mode transition lottery based on that specific opportunity is not won, a configuration is adopted in which a value smaller than normal is added (not added) to the opportunity through counter, thereby eliminating the unfair increase in the occurrence rate of special notifications and table notification effects caused by repeated occurrence of specific opportunities via the first BB state as described above.

In addition, when a specific trigger occurs during the second BB state, it is highly likely that at least 25 games were played in a non-internal state or an internal state during this favorable period in addition to the 25 games in the second BB state. As already explained, non-internal and internal states result in a greater number of medal losses per game than the first BB and second BB states. Therefore, in such cases, by adding a larger value to the trigger pass counter in the second BB state than in the first BB state, it is possible to compensate for the medal loss in the non-internal and internal states as described above.

Furthermore, even in the non-internal state and the internal state, the number of medals lost per game is greater in a 3-bet game than in a 2-bet game. Moreover, in a 3-bet game, there is a possibility that a transition to the lottery mode may occur, so even after transitioning to the second mode, playing a 3-bet game may cause the transition to the first mode before a specific opportunity occurs. There is a possibility that it will happen. Therefore, by increasing the value added to the opportunity through counter in a 3-bet game than in a 2-bet game, it is possible to reduce the number of medals in the non-internal state or internal state as described above, and prevent the transition to lottery mode. It can be used as compensation for risks.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the number of games required until a specific opportunity occurs is determined by lottery. Figure 68 (a) is a flowchart showing the advantageous zone transition game processing in this modified example. Note that this modified example will be described based on the first embodiment.

In step S2801, a lottery process for a trigger game is executed. Trigger game lottery processing is a process that determines by lottery the number of games in an advantageous section that is required until a specific opportunity occurs.For example, one game number out of the number of games from 1 to 100 is selected until a specific opportunity occurs. randomly determined as the number of games. In addition, in such a lottery, a configuration may be adopted in which the setting value has an effect such that the higher the setting value is, the smaller the number of games is likely to be selected, and the lower the setting value is, the more likely the number of games is to be selected.

In step S2802, processing is executed to store the number of trigger games determined in step S2801 by inputting it into the trigger counter in the various counter areas 106e. Then, in step S2803, the process of setting the trigger game number command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process for the advantageous section transition game ends.

The display control device 81 may be configured, for example, so that the game number notification effect, lottery preview effect, and standby effect are not executed, making it impossible or difficult for the player to identify that a specific opportunity has occurred. In this way, in addition to the game of predicting that the lottery mode has shifted to the second mode with a higher probability, a game of predicting that a specific opportunity has occurred or the number of games required until the specific opportunity occurs is added, making the game even more interesting.

In this case, for example, it may be configured such that whether or not to execute the number of games notification performance, lottery preview performance, standby performance, etc. is determined by lottery, etc., and the winning probability of such lottery is determined by the set value or the value of the trigger through counter. It may also be configured to have an effect. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the occurrence rate of these effects, and the larger the value of the opportunity through counter, the higher the occurrence rate of these effects.

FIG. 68(b) is a flowchart showing lottery opportunity determination processing in this modification.

In step S2811, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous zone AG matches the number of trigger games (trigger counter) stored in step S2802 above. If it is not a trigger game, this lottery trigger determination process is terminated. If it is the number of trigger games, a lottery trigger flag is set in step S2812, and a process is executed in step S2813 to set the lottery trigger command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this lottery trigger determination process is terminated.

By doing this, the number of games in which a specific trigger occurs is diversified, so when playing the games required until a specific trigger occurs in limited play, it becomes difficult for the player to know how long the limited play should continue. Therefore, in addition to the game of predicting the lottery mode, a game of predicting the game in which a specific trigger occurs is added, and the excitement of the game is increased.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the execution mode of special notification is different. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing special notification processing in this modification. As already explained, the special notification process is a process executed in step S1806 in the full stop effect setting process.

In step S2901, it is determined whether the current game is an advantageous section transition game. If the game is an advantageous section transition game, a process of determining the opportunity through counter is executed in step S2902. Then, in step S2903, a migration navigation lottery process is executed. The transition navigation lottery process is a process for performing a lottery to determine whether to execute transition navigation notification that the lottery mode has transitioned from the first mode to the second mode. In the transition navigation lottery process, a transition navigation lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a, and a lottery for executing transition navigation notification is performed. As shown in FIG. 70, the migration navigation lottery table is set so that the winning rate of the migration navigation lottery differs depending on the opportunity through counter and the set value.The larger the value of the opportunity through counter, the easier it is to win; It is set so that the higher the prize, the easier it is to win. In addition, when the value of the opportunity through counter is small, the even number setting is set so that it is easier to win than the odd number setting, and when the value of the opportunity through counter increases, the odd number setting is more likely to win than the even number setting. It is designed to make it easier to win.

In step S2904, it is determined whether or not the transition navigation lottery in step S2903 has been won. If the lottery has been won, a process is executed in step S2905 to set a navigation flag in the various flag storage area 183a. The navigation flag is a flag for notifying in advance that a special notification will be executed when the lottery mode transitions to the first mode or the second mode.

In other words, in this modified example, the display control device 81 does not know in real time whether the mode is the first mode or the second mode, but only knows that a transition to the first mode or the second mode lottery mode has occurred. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71, in the AT lottery mode notification process in this modified example, if a first mode transition command or a second mode transition command is received in step S3001, it is determined in step S3002 whether the above-mentioned navigation flag is set. If the navigation flag is set, a special notification flag is set in the various flags storage area 183a in step S3003.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3001 or step S3002, or after the processing of step S3003 is executed, processing for managing the trigger skip counter is executed in steps S3004 to S3007. The processing of these steps S3004 to S3007 is the same as the processing of steps S1705 to S1708 described above.

Returning to the explanation of the special notification process, if a negative judgment is made in step S2901 or step S2904, or if the process of step S2905 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2906. In step S2906, it is judged whether or not the above-mentioned special notification flag is set. If the special notification flag is set, the special notification flag is cleared in step S2907, and in step S2908, a performance setting is executed so that the special notification is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 as a full stop performance, and then the special notification process is terminated.

That is, in this modified example, a special notification may be executed as a full stop effect for a game that has transitioned from the first mode to the second mode, or from the second mode to the first mode. Therefore, a player who has confirmed the special notification can predict whether the lottery mode has transitioned from the first mode to the second mode or from the second mode to the first mode based on the lottery result of the game, the presence or absence of special notifications in previous games, the lottery results, etc., and if it is predicted that the lottery mode has transitioned to the second mode, it is possible to switch to limited play from the next game and generate a specific opportunity while maintaining the second mode. In this way, compared to a configuration in which the second mode is directly notified by a special notification, the fun of considering the lottery result of the game is added when playing a predictive game of mode transition, and the excitement of predicting the lottery mode can be increased.

In other words, the transition from the first mode to the second mode is likely to occur in a specific role as a so-called rare role, and may also occur in some normal reps A to C, while the transition from the second mode to the first mode is , it does not occur in specific roles, but occurs in normal replies A to normal replies C, so if a special notification occurs in a game where a specific role is won, it is confirmed that a transition to the second mode has occurred. do. On the other hand, when a special notification occurs in a game where you win normal reply A to normal reply C, a transition to the first mode may occur, and a transition to the second mode may occur. There will be cases. Then, for example, if a special notification occurs in a game in which a specific winning combination is won, and then a special notification occurs in a game in which normal reply A to normal reply C are won, the corresponding normal reply A to normal reply C winning game The special notification in the lottery mode is likely to correspond to the transition to the first mode. It becomes necessary to make predictions. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the display control device 81 does not know whether it is the first mode or the second mode, and is configured to be able to notify the transition to the lottery mode. Therefore, by consolidating the processes related to the player's interests, such as the lottery process for each game, management of advantageous zones, and whether or not the display mode will transition, on the main control device 101 side, while consolidating the processing related to the presentation on the display control device 81 side, it is possible to achieve playability using the lottery mode while ensuring the benefits of distributing the processing load and facilitating fraud prevention measures by consolidating the control devices that should take fraud prevention measures.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the manner in which the AT mode transition lottery is executed is changed. Fig. 72 is a flowchart showing the reel control process in this embodiment.

This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that after executing the second section display process and before executing the winning result command, a random number acquisition process (step S3117) is executed. The processing (steps S3101 to S3116, and S3118) is similar to the processing of steps S401 to S417 in the first embodiment.

<Random number acquisition process>
The random number acquisition process in step S3117 is a process for acquiring in advance a random number for the AT mode transition lottery. As described above, the random number acquisition process is performed after the stop operation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in the reel control process. In other words, the random number acquisition process is performed based on the third stop OFF operation in the third stop operation among the stop operations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 73, in step S3201, it is determined whether the first BB status flag or the second BB status flag is set. If none of the BB status flags is set, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the game to be ended this time is a 3-bet game. Further, if it is determined in step S3201 that any BB status flag is set, it is determined in step S3203 whether or not the game to be ended this time is a 2-bet game. That is, the processing from step S3201 to step S3203 is a process for determining whether the number of bets is a specified number according to the gaming state, and whether or not the number of bets is a permissible state in which execution of the processing related to the instruction function is permitted. This is a process of determining whether or not there is a restriction state in which the information is restricted. Then, when it is determined in step S3202 that it is a 2-bet game, and when it is determined that it is a 3-bet game in step S3203, a process for obtaining a random number for the AT mode transition lottery from step S3204 onwards is executed. The random number acquisition process is ended without any change.

If it is determined in step S3202 that it is a 3-bet game, or if it is determined that it is a 2-bet game in step S3203, the process advances to step S3204. In step S3204, processing for acquiring AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is executed. The AT counter corresponds to a lottery random number used for the AT mode transition lottery, and the AT counter increments by 1 within the range of 1 to 128 every time the timer update process in step S108 in the timer interrupt process is started. It is a loop counter that is added and returns to 1 after reaching the maximum value (ie 128).

In addition, like the free-running counter and hardware circuit used to determine whether a hand is successful, a dedicated free-running counter and hardware circuit may be used, and the hardware circuit may latch the value of the free-running counter before the processing of step S3204 (for example, when the third stop ON operation is performed), and the latched value may be read in step S3204.In addition, the latched value may be temporarily stored in a specified area of RAM 106 until the processing of step S3204 is performed.

In step S3205, processing is executed to store the value of the AT counter acquired in step S3204 in the lottery information storage area 106g of the RAM 106. The lottery information storage area 106g includes a storage area RE and an execution area AE, as shown in FIG. 74. The storage area RE is composed of a plurality of storage areas and includes a first storage area RE1 to a tenth storage area RE10.

In the first storage area RE1 to the tenth storage area RE10, when the AT counter acquisition condition is satisfied, the AT counter is stored in the order of first storage area RE1 → second storage area RE2 → third storage area RE3, etc. are stored chronologically. By having 10 storage areas as the plurality of storage areas, up to 10 random numbers for lottery used in the AT mode transition lottery are stored.

In step S3205, the value of the AT counter obtained in step S3204 is stored in the area with the smallest number (youngest area) among the empty areas in the first storage area RE1 to the tenth storage area RE10. For example, if the value of the AT counter is stored in each of the first storage area RE1 to the ninth storage area RE9, and the tenth storage area RE10 is an empty area, in step S3205, the value of the AT counter is acquired in step S3204. The AT counter value thus obtained is stored in the tenth storage area RE10.

The configuration is not limited to storing the AT counter value as is, but may store information corresponding to the AT counter value, for example, the AT counter value may be converted to a value for AT mode lottery and then stored.

In step S3206, the AT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the random number acquisition process is ended. The AT command includes information corresponding to the AT counter value stored this time as well as information corresponding to the AT counter values stored in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10. Therefore, by receiving the AT command, the display control device 81 can grasp the information in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 in the lottery information storage area 106g.

The random number acquisition process is started regardless of the lottery results of each game, and the AT counter is acquired regardless of the lottery results of each game. In other words, the AT counter is acquired independently of the lottery results of the game at the time of acquisition.

Figure 75 is a flowchart showing the lottery result response processing in this embodiment.

This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a random number shift process is performed to update the storage area of the AT counter acquired in the random number acquisition process for each game in which the AT mode transition lottery can be executed. This is different from the lottery result handling process. That is, in steps S3301 to S3303, similarly to steps S601 to S603 above, after executing the process of determining whether the number of bets is a specified number according to the gaming state, in step S3304 a random number is determined. Execute shift processing. After executing the random number shift processing, in steps S3305 to S3313, similar to steps S604 to S612 above, processing related to instruction functions such as processing for shifting to an advantageous section, processing for AT mode, and pressing order are performed. Performs notification processing, etc.

<Processing for random number shift>
The random number shift process in step S3304 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 76.

First, in step S3401, among the storage areas RE1 to RE10, random number information for lottery (information corresponding to the AT counter) stored in the first storage area RE1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and 1 performs processing to clear the random number information stored in the storage area RE1. The execution area AE is an area for storing information on random numbers used for the AT mode transition lottery when the AT mode transition lottery is held in the current game. In the AT mode transition lottery, information corresponding to the AT counter stored in the execution area AE is acquired as random number information to be used in the current AT mode transition lottery. That is, the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on information shifted to the execution area AE from among the AT counter information acquired in advance.

In the following step S3402, the information stored in each of the storage areas RE2 to RE10 is shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the information stored in the second storage area RE2 is stored in the first storage area RE1, and the information stored in the second storage area RE2 is cleared, and in order, the information stored in the third storage area RE3→ The information in each area is shifted in the following order: second storage area RE2, fourth storage area RE4→third storage area RE3...tenth storage area RE10→ninth storage area RE9. In this case, information is only shifted from the tenth storage area RE10 to the ninth storage area RE9, and no new information is shifted. In other words, the information in the tenth storage area RE10 is cleared, and the tenth storage area RE10 becomes an empty area.

In the next step S3403, a process is executed to set the shift command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the random number shift process is terminated. The shift command is a command for making the display control device 81 aware that the above-mentioned shift of the AT counter has been performed.

Next, the AT lottery process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77.

In this embodiment, first, the process for the AT mode transition lottery mode is executed in steps S3501 to S3505, and then the process for the AT mode transition lottery is executed in steps S3506 to S3518.

Here, in this embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity described in the first embodiment is not set, and the configuration (step S1313) in which the advantageous zone ends when the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific opportunity is not won is also not set. In other words, as shown in FIG. 78, in the second zone display process in this embodiment, similar to steps S1301 to S1307, after executing the processing during the advantageous zone in steps S3601 to S3607, it is determined in step S3608 whether the forced termination condition of the advantageous zone is satisfied, and if it is satisfied, the processing for the advantageous zone termination is executed in steps S3609 to S3611, similar to steps S1309 to S1311. If the forced termination condition is not satisfied, it is determined in step S3612 whether the AT mode termination flag is set, and if it is set, the process proceeds to step S3609 and executes the processing for the advantageous zone termination. If the AT mode termination flag is not set, the second zone display process is terminated as it is.

In addition, the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery in this embodiment is determined by the mode transition table and the number of games in the advantageous zone AG, as in the first embodiment of the first modification. As shown in FIG. 80, the mode transition table in this embodiment is set to a first mode on the low probability side and a second mode on the high probability side according to the value of the number of games in the advantageous zone AG, as in the mode transition table in the first embodiment of the first modification. In this embodiment, the value of the last two digits of the value of the number of games in the advantageous zone AG corresponds to the lottery mode, and more specifically, for example, in the mode transition table of the address information M0001, if the last two digits of the number of games in the advantageous zone AG are 1 to 59, it is set to the first mode, and if the last two digits are 60 to 99, it is set to the second mode. In this embodiment, the mode transition table is set so that the first mode and the second mode occur regardless of the value of the number of games in the advantageous zone AG. In other words, it is set so that the type of lottery mode is not determined only by the number of games in the advantageous zone AG. Furthermore, the mode transition table in this embodiment is also set to include at least a section that is the second mode, and no mode transition table is set to the first mode regardless of the value of the advantageous zone game count AG. In contrast, the mode transition table for address information MXXXX is set to the second mode for all values of the advantageous zone game count AG from 1 to 99, and is a mode transition table that does not include a section that is the first mode.

The mode transition table is updated every predetermined number of games, and in this embodiment, it is configured to be updated every 100 games after transition to the advantageous section. In the advantageous section transition game processing performed in the advantageous section transition game in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79(a), a mode transition table lottery process is executed in step S3701. In the following step S3702, based on the processing result of step S3701, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined mode transition table in the address information storage area 106f. Thereafter, in step S3703, processing for setting the table command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. Then, in step S3704, a process of inputting 100 to the mode transition trigger counter in the various counter areas 106e is executed, and then the process for the advantageous section transition game ends. The mode shift trigger counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the mode shift table lottery trigger, and is decremented by 1 each time one game is played, and when it reaches 0, the mode shift table lottery trigger occurs. There is. That is, in this embodiment, the mode transition table can be updated not only when changing to an advantageous section but also every time 100 games are played.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 79(b), in the lottery trigger determination process, first, in step S3711, a subtraction process is performed on the mode transition trigger counter set in step S3704. Then, in step S3712, it is determined whether the mode transition trigger counter has become 0. If it has become 0, in step S3713, a process is performed to set a mode transition trigger flag in the various flag storage area 106d. Then, in step S3714, 100 is input to the mode transition trigger counter, and the lottery trigger determination process is terminated. If the mode transition trigger counter is not 0 in step S3712, it is determined in step S3715 whether the mode transition trigger counter is 5, and if it is not 5, the lottery trigger determination process is terminated. If the mode transition trigger counter is 5, in step S3716, a process is performed to set the notification restriction command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the lottery trigger determination process is terminated. The notification restriction command will be described in detail later.

Now, returning to the explanation of the AT lottery process, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned mode shift trigger flag is set. If the mode shift trigger flag is set, processing for clearing the mode shift trigger flag is executed in step S3502. Then, in step S3503, a mode transition table lottery process is executed similarly to step S3701. Thereafter, in step S3504, address information of the mode transition table is stored based on the processing result of step S3503, and in step S3505, the table command is set as an output target to the display control device 81.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3501, or after the processing of step S3505 is executed, a process of grasping the current mode transition table is executed in step S3506. Then, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is grasped in step S3507, and from the mode transition table and the number of games in the advantageous zone AG, it is judged in step S3508 whether or not the current lottery mode is the first mode. If it is the first mode, a process of acquiring the first AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed in step S3509, and if it is the second mode, a process of acquiring the second AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed in step S3510.

As shown in FIG. 81, the first AT mode transition lottery table and the second AT mode transition lottery table determine the AT counter value that will win the AT mode transition lottery depending on the lottery result of each game. For example, in the first AT mode transition lottery table, if the lottery result of the game is normal reply A, the AT mode transition lottery is won if the AT counter is 128, and is not won if the AT counter is 1 to 127. Also, if the lottery result of the game is chance eye B, the AT mode transition lottery is won if the AT counter is 1 to 8, and is not won if the AT counter is 9 to 128.

In contrast, the second AT mode transition lottery table is set to have a greater variety of AT counter values associated with the lottery results of each game than the first AT mode transition lottery table. For example, in the second AT mode transition lottery table, if the lottery result of the game is normal reply A, the AT mode transition lottery is won not only when the AT counter is 128 but also when it is 1 to 4, and it is not won if the AT counter is 5 to 127. Also, if the lottery result of the game is chance eye B, the AT mode transition lottery is won not only when the AT counter is 1 to 8 but also when the AT counter is 9 to 64, and it is not won if the AT counter is 65 to 128.

After obtaining the AT mode transition lottery table in step S3509 or step S3510, the game lottery result is ascertained in step S3511, and in step S3512, a process is executed to obtain information corresponding to the AT counter shifted to the execution area AE in the random number shift process as random number information to be used in the current AT mode transition lottery.

Then, in step S3513, an AT mode transition lottery is executed, and in step S3514, it is determined whether the AT mode transition lottery has been won. If it has been won, the AT mode winning flag is set in step S3515, and the AT winning notification command is set as the output target to the display control device 81 in step S3516. The AT lottery process ends. If it is determined in step S3514 that the winning result has not been won, it is determined in step S3517 whether or not the lottery result of the game used for the current AT mode shift lottery was a specific winning combination as a so-called rare winning combination. If it is a specific combination, in step S3518, a process is executed to set the trigger non-winning command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this AT lottery process is ended. If it is not a specific combination, the main AT lottery process is immediately ended.

Next, we will explain the processing on the display control device 81 side in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, compared to the first embodiment described above, the processing configuration for notifying the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery and the processing configuration for executing the result notification performance of the AT mode transition lottery are different, and a processing configuration for notifying the AT counter obtained in advance as described above is added.

In other words, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82, in the start-time performance setting process in this embodiment, the configuration of the AT lottery mode notification process (step S3808) and the configuration for executing the AT mode transition lottery result notification effect (steps S3809 to S3810) are different from those in the first embodiment described above, and in this embodiment, after performing the process for executing the AT mode transition lottery result notification effect, in step S3811, a pending display process for notifying the previously acquired AT counter is added before performing other start-time performance setting processes (step S3812).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 83, in the full stop effect setting process in this embodiment, the configuration of the lottery trigger notification process (step S3905) and the configuration of the special notification process (step S3906) are different from those in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, after executing the process for setting the AT end notification effect (step S3902) and the special notification process (step S3906), and before executing other full stop effect setting processes (step S3908), a hold shift process for notifying the AT counter obtained in advance is added in step S3907.

<Hold display processing>
First, the pending display process executed in step S3811 of the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84.

In step S4001, it is determined whether the AT mode is in effect. If it is in the AT mode, the pending display process is immediately terminated. If it is not in AT mode, it is determined in step S4002 whether an AT command is being received. If no AT command has been received, the pending display process is ended. If an AT command has been received, the process advances to step S4003. As already explained, the case where the AT command is received is the case where it is determined in the random number acquisition process (FIG. 73) on the main control device 101 side that the number of bets is a specified number corresponding to the gaming state.

In step S4003, based on the information contained in the received AT command, a process is performed to store AT counter information corresponding to each of the memory areas RE1 to RE10 in the pending information memory area of RAM 183. Although detailed explanation using figures is omitted, the pending information memory area on the display control device 81 side has a configuration similar to that of the lottery information memory area 106g on the main control device 101 side, and has each memory area (first memory area to tenth memory area) capable of storing AT counter information for 10 games (10 AT mode transition lotteries), as well as an execution area for storing AT counter information for the game that is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery. In step S4003, based on the received AT command, the AT counter information in the first storage area RE1 on the main control device 101 side is stored in the first storage area in the hold information storage area, the AT counter information in the second storage area RE2 is stored in the second storage area in the hold information storage area, ... the AT counter information in the tenth storage area RE10 is stored in the tenth storage area in the hold information storage area, and the AT counter information in the execution area AE is stored in the execution area in the hold information storage area.

In the following step S4004, a pending display lottery process is performed. The pending display lottery process is a lottery process in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display on the auxiliary display section 65 a display corresponding to the AT counter acquired at the current acquisition opportunity.

Here, the hold display shown on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained with reference to Figure 85.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), a reserved display area Dr is set at the bottom as a predetermined display area in the auxiliary display unit 65. The reserved display area Dr is partitioned so that the same number of unit reserved display areas Dr1 to Dr10 as the maximum number of AT counters stored in the reserved information storage area are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Specifically, the reserved display area Dr is set with the first unit reserved display area Dr1, the second unit reserved display area Dr2, the third unit reserved display area Dr3, the fourth unit reserved display area Dr4, the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5, the sixth unit reserved display area Dr6, the seventh unit reserved display area Dr7, the eighth unit reserved display area Dr8, the ninth unit reserved display area Dr9, and the tenth unit reserved display area Dr10. In addition, an execution display area Dp for displaying the reserved AT counters stored in the execution area of the reserved information storage area is set on the left side of the reserved display area Dr (the left side of the first unit reserved display area Dr1) next to the reserved display area Dr. The execution display area Dp is partitioned as an area larger than each of the unit pending display areas Dr1 to Dr10, and allows the player to clearly distinguish between the pending display for the AT mode transition lottery for the game in question and the pending display for the AT mode transition lottery for a later game than the current game.

As shown in FIG. 85(b), the first special image P1 to the sixth special image P6 are set as pending displays to be displayed in the execution display area Dp and the pending display area Dr. The first special image P1 to the sixth special image P6 are displayed in a manner corresponding to the value of the AT counter, so that if the AT counter is 1 to 4, the first special image P1 is displayed; if the AT counter is 5 to 8, the second special image P2 is displayed; if the AT counter is 9 to 64, the third special image P3 is displayed; if the AT counter is 65 to 94, the fourth special image P4 is displayed; if the AT counter is 95 to 127, the fifth special image P5 is displayed; and if the AT counter is 128, the sixth special image P6 is displayed.

The first special image P1 to the sixth special image P6 are displayed with different characters and colors so that the player can distinguish between them. In Figure 85(a), the second special image P2 is displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, the fifth special image P5 is displayed in the third unit hold display area Dr3, the sixth special image P6 is displayed in the eighth unit hold display area Dr8, the first special image P1 is displayed in the ninth unit hold display area Dr9, and the first special image P1 is displayed in the execution display area Dp.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter shifted to the execution area AE and the game lottery result. In this case, for example, if it is a game in which the first special image P1 is displayed in the execution display area Dp and the game is in the first mode, Chance A to Chance C, Cherry A to Cherry C, and If it is either watermelon, you will win the AT mode transition lottery, and if it is anything else, you will not win the AT mode transition lottery (FIG. 81(a)). For example, if the sixth special image P6 is displayed in the execution display area Dp, and the game is in the second mode, normal reply A to normal reply C, chance C, cherry C, If it is either the common bell or the pressed order bell, the AT mode transition lottery will be won, and if it is not, the AT mode transition lottery will not be won (FIG. 81(b)).

Returning to the explanation of the pending display process, the pending display lottery process performed in step S4004 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to display the pending display corresponding to the currently acquired AT counter from among the currently received AT commands (basically the pending display corresponding to the 10th unit pending display area Dr10). In this embodiment, the winning probability of such a lottery is set to approximately one in five probability, such that the display lottery is won and the pending display is displayed. In this case, the winning probability is set so that the winning probability of the pending display lottery is greater than the reciprocal of the number of multiple unit pending display areas Dr1 to Dr10, and the probability is set so that at least one (two in the above probability) of the multiple unit pending display areas Dr1 to Dr10 will display a pending display on average.

After executing the process of step S4004, it is determined in step S4005 whether or not the hold display lottery has been won. If the winner has not been won, the pending display process is immediately terminated, and if the winner has been won, the process advances to step S4006. In step S4006, a process is executed to read from the ROM 182 image data corresponding to the special image corresponding to the AT counter acquired at the current acquisition opportunity. Then, in step S4007, a process is executed to display a special image corresponding to the read image data in the unit pending display area corresponding to the AT counter acquired at the current acquisition opportunity. More specifically, the AT counter acquired this time is stored in the empty area with the lowest number (basically the 10th storage area) among the empty areas of the reservation information storage area, and the unit corresponding to the storage area is stored. The auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so that a special image corresponding to the current AT counter is displayed in the hold display area (basically the 10th unit hold display area Dr10). After executing the process in step S4007, the pending display process is ended.

<Processing for reserved shift>
Next, with reference to Figure 86, we will explain the hold shift process for shifting the display area of the hold display started as described above in accordance with the progress of the game.

In step S4101, it is determined whether a shift command has been received from the main controller 101. If no shift command has been received, the pending shift process is ended. As already explained, the shift command is a command output in the random number shift process when the number of bets is a specified number according to the gaming state in the lottery result corresponding process on the main control device 101 side.

If a shift command has been received, in step S4102, processing is performed to clear the pending display in the execution display area Dp. More specifically, when a special image is displayed as a pending display in the execution display area Dp, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to erase the special image, and the special image is not displayed in the execution display area Dp. If it is not displayed, that state is maintained. Then, in step S4103, processing is performed to shift the pending display in the first unit pending display area Dr1 to the execution display area Dp. More specifically, when a special image pending display is displayed in the first unit pending display area Dr1, the pending display is displayed in the execution display area Dp, and the first unit pending display area The auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to erase the hold display displayed in Dr1, and if the hold display is not displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, that state is maintained. In the subsequent step S4104, processing is performed to shift the hold display in each unit hold display area to a lower display area. More specifically, the hold display of the special image displayed in the second unit hold display area Dr2 is displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, and the hold display displayed in the second unit hold display area Dr2 is also displayed. 3rd unit reservation display area Dr3 → 2nd unit reservation display area Dr2, 4th unit reservation display area Dr4 → 3rd unit reservation display area Dr3... 10th unit reservation display area Dr10 → 9th unit The hold display of each unit hold display area is shifted such as hold display area Dr9. In this case, regarding the unit hold display area where the hold display is not performed, the state where the hold display is not performed is shifted to the lower unit hold display area as it is. Then, the hold display is only shifted from the tenth unit hold display area Dr10 to the ninth unit hold display area Dr9, and no new hold display is shifted. That is, the hold display in the tenth unit hold display area Dr10 is cleared, and the tenth unit hold display area Dr10 is in a state where no hold display is performed. If no shift command has been received in step S4101, or after executing the process in step S4104, this pending shift process ends.

<Relationship between AT mode transition lottery and pending display>
The manner in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the AT counter acquired in advance will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88.

In FIGS. 87(a1) and 87(b1), in the situation before the start of the game (at the time of starting), FIG. 87(b1) indicates a storage area RE and an execution area AE in the lottery information storage area 106g. For example, "73" is stored in the execution area AE as information corresponding to the AT counter, and the fourth special image P4 is displayed as a pending display corresponding to the AT counter in the execution display area Dp. In addition, as a random number used for the AT mode transition lottery for the next game, "35" is stored in the first storage area RE1 as information corresponding to the AT counter, and in the first unit reservation display area Dr1 corresponding to the AT counter. A third special image P3 is displayed as a pending display. In this situation, a case will be described in which the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game, and a watermelon is won in the lottery process of the next game.

When the number of bets for the current game is a specific number according to the game status, random number shift processing and reserve shift processing are performed based on the operation of the start lever 41. Figures 87(a2) and 87(b2) show a situation in which the AT counter information and reserve display have been shifted by one game from the situation in Figures 87(a1) and 87(b1), where the AT counter information stored in the first memory area RE1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the third special image P3 displayed in the first unit reserve display area Dr1 is shifted to the execution display area Dp. Also, Figures 87(a1) and 87(b2) show the state in which the tenth memory area RE10 and the tenth unit reserve display area Dr10 become empty areas as a result of the random number shift processing and reserve shift processing.

As already explained, the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the information on the AT counter shifted to the execution area AE, the information on the lottery result of the current game, and the AT mode transition lottery table. The AT mode transition lottery table is set with a first AT mode transition lottery table on the low probability side and a second AT mode transition lottery table on the high probability side. In this case, when the AT mode transition lottery is held using the AT counter (35) shifted to the execution area AE in FIG. In the AT mode transition lottery table, the winning result is obtained (FIG. 81).

As described above, in a game in which a watermelon win occurs (a game in which the AT mode transition lottery is won), when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a watermelon win can occur, as shown in FIG. 88. The random number acquisition process is performed based on the third stop OFF operation, and FIG. 88(b) shows that an AT counter for the tenth memory area RE10 is acquired based on the third stop OFF operation that results in a watermelon win. Then, by storing the AT counter in the tenth memory area RE10, the sixth special image P6 can be displayed as a pending display corresponding to that AT counter, as shown in FIG. 88(a).

As described above, in the configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter acquired in advance, since a pending display corresponding to the AT counter is displayed, a lottery for games that can win the AT mode transition lottery It becomes possible to proceed with the game after understanding the content of the result in advance. Then, for example, after three games, the sixth special image P6 corresponding to the normal combinations such as normal reply A to normal reply C, common bell, and push order bell is displayed in the third unit holding display area Dr3 as a corresponding holding display after three games. If the situation is right, it is possible to play between three games with the hope that the regular winning combination will be won after the third game instead of after the first or second game, which will greatly improve the fun of each game. do. In this case, when the sixth special image P6 is displayed as described above, if the first mode is on the low probability side, only the normal winning combination corresponds to the AT mode transition winning, but in the second mode on the high probability side In the mode, in addition to the normal winning combination, cherry C and chance winning C also correspond to AT mode transition winnings.

In particular, the first special image P1 and the second special image P2 are displayed for normal roles such as normal reply A to normal reply C and push order bell, which have a high winning probability in each game in the non-internal state and internal state. In this case, in the first mode, none of the regular winning combinations corresponds to winning the AT mode transition, but in the second mode, if the first special image P1 is the winning number, any regular winning combination can win the AT mode transition. Correspondingly, if it is the second special image P2, the pressing order bell of the normal winning combination corresponds to the AT mode transition winning.

As already explained above, the advance acquisition and shift of the AT counter are executed when the bet number is a specified number according to the gaming state, and if the number of bets is not the specified specified number, the AT counter is acquired in advance. and shift execution are restricted. On the other hand, the first mode and the second mode in the present embodiment are defined by the number of advantageous zone games AG, and the transition between the first mode and the second mode is based on a specified number of bets depending on the gaming state. It occurs regardless of whether it is or not. In other words, by playing the game in a restricted state with bets other than the specified specified number, it is possible to cause a transition between the first mode and the second mode while maintaining the AT counter acquired in advance.

That is, for example, the above-mentioned first special image P1 and second special image P2 are pending displays that are displayed when the value of the AT counter is 1 to 8, and are acquired with a probability of 8/128 and are pending displays. Since it is displayed when winning a lottery (50%), its appearance rate can be said to be relatively lower than other special images. Then, if it is possible to receive an AT mode transition lottery using the AT counters corresponding to these first special images P1 and second special images P2, the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counters will be executed in the second mode. There is an advantage of playing the game in a restricted state in which the shift of the AT counter is restricted until the AT counter is changed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a gaming feature is realized in which the player is allowed to judge whether or not to play a game in a restricted state based on the relationship with the hold display.

<AT lottery mode notification process>
FIG. 89(a) is a flowchart showing the AT lottery mode notification process in this embodiment.

In step S4201, it is determined whether a table command has been received. As already explained, the table command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the mode transition table is updated in the advantageous section transition game process (FIG. 79) or the AT lottery process (FIG. 77). It is. If a table command has been received, in step S4202, processing is executed to store address information of the mode transition table in the address information storage area 183c. In the following step S4203, a process of adding 1 to the table update counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The table update counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to keep track of the number of consecutive times the mode transition table has been updated without winning the AT mode transition lottery. In the following step S4204, processing is executed to clear the notification restriction flag provided in the various flag storage area 183a.

The notification restriction flag is a flag for restricting the execution of the suggestive performance in the lottery mode when the suggestive performance is performed. The notification restriction flag is set when the notification declaration command output from the main control device 101 is received when the mode transition trigger counter becomes 5. That is, as shown in FIG. 89(b), in the notification restriction process performed as one process of the other all-stop performance setting process (step S1808) in the all-stop performance setting process in this embodiment, it is determined in step S4211 whether or not the notification restriction command has been received, and if it has been received, the notification restriction flag is set in step S4212. If a negative determination is made in step S4211, or after the process of step S4212 is executed, the notification restriction process is terminated. The process for restricting the execution of the suggestive performance in the lottery mode when the notification restriction flag is set will be described in detail later. Note that if the notification restriction flag is not set in step S4204, the state is maintained.

If a negative determination is made in step S4201, or after executing the process in step S4204, the process advances to step S4205, and it is determined whether or not a trigger non-winning command has been received. As already explained, the trigger non-winning command in this embodiment is executed by the main controller 101 when the lottery result of the game used for the AT mode transition lottery is a specific combination and the AT mode transition lottery is not won. This is the command output from. If the trigger non-winning command has been received, in step S4206, a process of incrementing the trigger through counter by 1 is executed. The opportunity through counter in this embodiment is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the consecutive number of times that the AT mode transition lottery using a specific combination has not been won.

If a negative determination is made in step S4205, or after executing the process in step S4206, it is determined in step S4207 whether or not an AT winning notification command has been received. If the AT winning notification command has been received, in step S4208, the table update counter and opportunity through counter are cleared to 0, and then the AT lottery mode notification process is ended. If the AT winning notification command has not been received in step S4207, the AT lottery mode notification process is immediately terminated.

<Lottery trigger notification process>
In the lottery trigger notification process in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, a process is executed to notify that the number of bets is not a specified number according to the gaming state but is in a limited state. .

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 90, in step S4301 it is determined whether the current game is a 3-bet game, and if it is a 3-bet game, in step S4302 the game is in the first BB state or the second BB state. Determine whether or not. If it is a 3-bet game and there is no first BB state or second BB state, the main lottery trigger notification process is immediately ended. On the other hand, even if it is a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game, if it is in the first BB state or the second BB state and is in the restricted state, the random number update restriction notification effect is displayed on the auxiliary display in step S4303. 65 and the speaker 64, and then the main lottery trigger notification process ends. As the random number update restriction notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 95(b), by displaying characters such as "HOLD!!" on the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65, it is possible to notify that the restriction state is in effect. I do. In addition, in this embodiment, the random number update restriction notification effect will be described as the same effect as the above-described mode transition restriction notification effect, but these effects may be different from each other, and at least each restriction state may be different. It may be any effect as long as it is an effect that the player can understand.

<Special notification processing>
In the special notification process in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 91, a process of grasping the current mode transition table is executed by referring to the address information storage area 183c in step S4401. In the following step S4402, a process of grasping the advantageous zone game number AG is executed based on the received advantageous zone game command. Then, in step S4403, it is determined whether the lottery mode of the current AT mode transition lottery is the second mode. If it is not the second mode but the first mode, in step S4404, a performance setting is executed to perform the first mode performance on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. For example, as the first mode performance, a performance of displaying the main character on the auxiliary display unit 65 is set as shown in FIG. 93(a).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the second mode is selected in step S4403, a second mode notification lottery process is executed in step S4405, and if the notification lottery is won (step S4406: YES), step In S4407, performance settings for performing the second mode performance on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are executed. As the second mode production, for example, as shown in FIG. 93(b), a production is set that shows a flame burning behind the main character on the auxiliary display section 65 and the main character's spirit increasing. There is.

That is, the player can know whether the current state is the first mode or the second mode by the presence or absence of a flame behind the main character displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the second mode notification lottery process in step S4405, the second mode notification lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a, and the set value set in the winning probability setting process and the table update counter are grasped to perform a lottery on whether or not to execute the second mode presentation in the current game. As shown in FIG. 92(a), the second mode notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the second mode notification lottery differs depending on the set value and the table update counter. Specifically, the larger the value of the table update counter is, the easier it is to win, and the higher the set value is, the easier it is to win. More specifically, the set value is set so that in the odd number setting, if the value of the table update counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (2), it is easier to win than in the even number setting, and in the even number setting, if the value of the table update counter is less than the predetermined value, it is easier to win than in the odd number setting.

If the winner is not selected in the second mode notification lottery process in step S4405, a first mode performance setting process is performed in step S4404. Note that the second mode performance may be always performed in the second mode without executing the second mode notification lottery process.

After executing the processing of step S4404 or step S4407, in step S4408, it is determined whether or not the notification restriction flag is set. If the notification restriction flag is set and there are 5 games remaining until the update game of the mode transition table, and the mode transition table has not been updated since then, the processing of steps S4410 to S4414 to execute the mode prediction presentation as a prediction presentation of the future lottery mode is not performed, and the special notification processing ends as it is.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4408, a prediction notification lottery process is executed in step S4409. In the prediction notification lottery process, a prediction notification lottery table is obtained from the various table memory area 182a, and the table update counter and the trigger pass counter are grasped to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a mode prediction performance in the current game. As shown in FIG. 92(b), the prediction notification lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the prediction notification lottery differs depending on the table update counter and the trigger pass counter. Specifically, it is set so that the larger the value of the table update counter, the easier it is to win, and the larger the value of the trigger pass counter, the easier it is to win.

In step S4410, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S4409 has been won, and if it has not been won, the special notification process is terminated as it is. If it has been won, the process proceeds to step S4411, and by grasping the mode transition table and the number of games in the favorable zone AG, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode will be updated after a predetermined number of games (after 5 games). An update trigger game is a game in which the first mode is updated to the second mode or the second mode is updated to the first mode, and specifically, a game in which the last two digits of the number of games in the favorable zone AG are 01, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, or 90 (FIG. 80). If the game after 5 games is not an update trigger game, the special notification process is terminated as it is. If it is an update trigger game, in step S4412, it is determined whether or not the game will be updated to the second mode after 5 games by grasping the mode transition table and the number of games in the favorable zone AG. If the mode is updated to the first mode instead of the second mode, in step S4413, the effect setting is executed to perform the first mode prediction effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, and then the special notification process is terminated. As the first mode prediction effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 94(b), an effect is set to display a candle character with its flame extinguished in an area of the auxiliary display unit 65 different from the area in which the main character is displayed.

If it is determined in step S4412 that the mode will be updated to the second mode after the predetermined number of games, in step S4414, the effect setting is executed to perform the second mode prediction effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, and then the special notification process is terminated. As the second mode prediction effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 94(a), an effect is set to display a candle character with a burning flame in an area different from the area in which the main character is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

<Game flow and hold display>
The relationship between the game flow using the game in the restricted state and the reserved display will be described with reference to Figures 95 to 98. Figure 95 shows the game flow when the game in the restricted state is not played, and Figure 96 shows the game flow when the game in the restricted state is played.

In FIG. 95(a), for example, the first special image P1 is displayed in the first unit reservation display area Dr1, and the fifth special image P5 is displayed in the third unit reservation display area Dr3 and the fifth unit reservation display area Dr5. Including this game, the 3 games (the last two digits of the value of the number of games in the advantageous period AG are 17 to 19) are in the first mode, and after the fourth game (the value of the number of games in the favorable period AG) is the first mode. The last two digits (20 to 29) indicate the second mode.

When such a situation is played in a 3-bet game in a non-internal state or an internal state, the number of advantageous section games AG is counted and the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery is also changed, and furthermore, the lottery information is stored in the lottery information storage area 106g. The current AT counter is also shifted. As a result, as shown in FIG. 95(b), when one game progresses from the situation in FIG. 95(a), the first special image P1 displayed in the first unit pending display area Dr1 is changed to the execution display area Dp. This game will be a lottery to switch to AT mode in the first mode. In this case, if you win a specific win as a so-called rare win, which is the lottery result corresponding to AT counters 1 to 4 corresponding to the first special image P1 in the first mode, you will win the AT mode transition lottery, but other If the lottery result is , you will not be selected for the AT mode transition lottery.

When one game progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 95(b), the first mode ends in the current game, and a lottery to shift to AT mode in the second mode is performed from the next game, as shown in FIG. 95(c). It becomes like this. Then, when one more game progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 95(c), as shown in FIG. 96(d), the AT mode transition lottery in the first mode starts from this game. The fifth special image P5 is shifted to the execution display area Dp, and the AT counter corresponding to the fifth special image P5 in the second mode is the chance C or cherry which is the lottery result corresponding to 95 to 127. If C is the winning result, the player wins the AT mode transition lottery, but if the result is any other lottery result, the AT mode transition lottery is not won.

FIG. 96(a) shows the same situation as FIG. 95(a). However, in the situation shown in FIG. 96(a), the second mode prediction effect is being executed on the auxiliary display section 65, as shown in FIG. 97(a), for example. In addition, in FIG. 97(a), the first mode performance is also executed in correspondence with the current lottery mode. Incidentally, in this figure, a special notification as a mode prediction notification after a predetermined number of games is shown as a mode prediction notification after three games. Therefore, the AT mode transition lottery at the AT counter corresponding to the first special image P1 that is waiting for the next game is executed in the first mode on the low probability side, and after the third game, the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the first mode on the low probability side. It is understood from these first mode effects and second mode prediction effects that there will be two modes.

Therefore, FIG. 96(b) shows a case where the game is switched to a 2-bet game and one game is progressed in the restricted state. In this case, in addition to counting the number of games in the advantageous section AG, the number of remaining games until the lottery mode is switched is also counted. While the game progresses, the shift of the AT counter stored in the lottery information storage area 106g is restricted. As a result, the first special image P1 displayed in the first unit pending display area Dr1 in FIG. 96(a) is maintained in the first unit pending display area Dr1 even if one game progresses. In this case, as shown in FIG. 97(b), a random number update restriction notification effect is executed, allowing the player to understand that the pending display will not be shifted. However, since the current lottery mode is still the first mode, the main character without flames is displayed and the first mode production is executed.

If one game is played in the restricted state from FIG. 96(b), the first mode will be played up to this game, and the second mode will be played from the next game, as shown in FIG. 97(c). However, because of the restricted state as described above, the AT counter is not shifted, and the first special image P1 displayed in the first unit reserve display area Dr1 is not shifted either. Then, if one game is played in the restricted state, the lottery mode will become the second mode, as shown in FIG. 97(d).

If the lottery mode becomes the second mode and, for example, the second mode effect is executed as shown in FIG. 98(a), the next game is played as a 3-bet game instead of a 2-bet game. As shown in FIG. 98(b), the first special image P1 displayed in the first unit reservation display area Dr1 is shifted to the execution display area Dp, and the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the second mode of the game. executed.

Here, the second mode performance is configured to be executed when the game is in the second mode and the second mode notification lottery process is won. Therefore, when the game transitions from the first mode to the second mode, the second mode performance may not be executed in the game in which the mode transition occurs. The second mode prediction performance is also configured to be executed when the game after the specified game is in the second mode and the prediction notification lottery is won. Therefore, the second mode prediction performance may not be executed in the game before the specified game in which the game transitions to the second mode. However, the prediction notification lottery is executed regardless of the lottery mode after the specified game, and if the prediction notification lottery is won, it can be said that the notification is more reliable than the first mode performance or the second mode performance because it is clear whether the game after the specified game is in the first mode or the second mode. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 97(a), when the second mode prediction effect occurs in the situation of FIG. 96(a), the player will be able to predict that the lottery mode will be the second mode, at least in the game after a certain number of games in which the last two digits of the advantageous zone game count AG are 22, even if the second mode effect has not occurred.

In other words, players try to understand the lottery mode by counting the number of games starting from the game in which the second mode predictive performance occurs, rather than trying to understand the lottery mode by the first mode performance and the second mode performance. Players who do this will be able to be more confident about shifting to the second mode in a faster game. Therefore, by increasing the degree of attention to the second mode predicted performance and ensuring the superiority of a high degree of understanding of the game content and performance content, it is possible to make the player more immersed in the game.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The AT mode transition lottery is configured to be performed using the AT counter obtained in advance and the game lottery results, and the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery is an allowable 3-bet game in a non-internal state or an internal state. The configuration is such that transition can occur in both games and limited games such as 2-bet games in non-internal states and internal states, and BB states, while AT counters are updated (shifted, acquired) in permitted games. , AT counter is not updated in limited games. By doing this, when the pre-obtained AT counter is given to the AT mode transition lottery, the update of the AT counter is restricted in the restricted game until the lottery mode becomes the second mode on the high probability side. You can make the player play games such as In other words, there are two lottery modes for the AT mode shift lottery: a first mode with a low probability and a second mode with a high probability.In each mode, the value of the AT counter that makes the AT mode shift win is determined based on the lottery result of the game. (correspondence information) is determined, and the game is made to wait in a limited game until the AT counter acquired in advance becomes the correspondence information as the value of the AT counter that will result in the AT mode shift winning. By doing this, it is possible to create a novel game in which it is determined whether to proceed with a permitted game or a restricted game by using the relationship between the AT counter and the corresponding information that has been acquired in advance. It becomes possible to realize gender.

In this embodiment, to switch from permitted play to restricted play, a player can simply switch from a 3-bet game to a 2-bet game or win a BB. In this way, by allowing the player to switch between permitted play and restricted play at their own will, it is possible to effectively avoid situations where the AT mode transition lottery or the update of the AT counter is unintentionally restricted.

In this case, since the AT counter information acquired in advance is configured to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as a pending display, a decision is made as to whether to switch to a restricted game based on the contents of the pending display. becomes possible. Furthermore, by switching to the limited game, a random number update limited notification effect is performed, and the shifting of the pending display itself is also limited, so that it becomes clearer that the limited game is being played. By doing this, for example, when playing a game by inserting medals from the medal slot 45, if the player happens to start the game by inserting two medals instead of three, the player can If the player unintentionally switches to a restricted game as a 2-bet game, it becomes easier to notice this, and the game hall manager can also easily identify that the restricted game is being played.

Furthermore, since it is configured to execute a first mode performance and a second mode performance as a special notification indicating the current lottery mode, the AT counter that has been acquired in advance will be used after understanding the current lottery mode. It becomes possible to predict the game that will be the corresponding information corresponding to the lottery mode and make adjustments based on the restricted games and allowed games.

As a special notification suggesting a future lottery mode, if there is a game that will cause a transition from the second mode to the first mode a predetermined number of games ahead, a second mode prediction effect is executed, and a predetermined number of games ahead. If there is a game in which a transition from the first mode to the second mode occurs, the second mode predictive effect is executed. By doing this, after understanding the lottery mode for a predetermined number of games ahead, the AT counter that has been acquired in advance predicts the game that will be the corresponding information corresponding to the lottery mode, and it is possible to predict the game that will be the corresponding information corresponding to the lottery mode by the restricted games and allowed games. It becomes possible to make adjustments.

In this case, the special notification suggesting the current lottery mode and the special notification suggesting the future lottery mode are different.The special notification suggesting the future lottery mode is more consistent with the actual lottery mode. The setting is made so that there is a high possibility that the In other words, with regard to special announcements that suggest the current lottery mode, even if the first mode production is performed, there is a possibility that the current lottery mode is in the second mode, and even if the special announcement is made, it is possible that the current lottery mode will be in the second mode. There are cases where it is not certain whether the mode is being stayed. On the other hand, regarding special notifications that suggest future lottery modes, if the first mode prediction performance is performed, it is confirmed that the transition to the first mode will occur, and if the second mode prediction performance is performed, the transition to the first mode will occur. It is determined that a transition to mode will occur. Therefore, if you are trying to identify the lottery mode transition in an earlier game, the 1st mode prediction effect and the 2nd mode prediction effect are better than the 1st mode effect and the 2nd mode effect. Contribution level increases. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably enhance the fun of the game in which the game switches between the restricted game and the permitted game, using the AT counter that has been acquired in advance and the advance understanding of the transition to the lottery mode.

Special notifications such as the first mode performance, the second mode performance, the first mode predictive performance, and the second mode predictive performance are configured so that they can be executed regardless of whether it is a permitted game or a restricted game. It becomes possible to determine the timing to switch to a restricted game during a restricted game, and it becomes possible to determine the timing to switch to a permitted game during a restricted game.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the occurrence rate of the special notification in the allowed game and the occurrence rate of the special notification in the restricted game are set to be the same, but they may be different. For example, the incidence rate of the special notification in the restricted game A configuration may be adopted in which special notification is more likely to occur than permissible games. In restricted games, the execution of AT mode transition lottery is restricted, so if the occurrence rate of special notification is low, the AT counter consumption will be restricted until the lottery mode reaches the desired lottery mode in restricted games. Despite this, there is a possibility that the player may become impatient and switch to the permissible game before the desired lottery mode is set, because he/she wants to receive the AT mode transition lottery. In this regard, by increasing the occurrence rate of special notifications in restricted games, it is possible to calm the players' sense of impatience and to suitably play games that require players to wait until the desired lottery mode is reached to consume the AT counter. .

In this embodiment, since the lottery mode is determined using the mode transition table and the number of games in the favorable zone AG, the corresponding information as the value of the AT counter set to be the AT mode transition winning for each lottery result of the game can be said to be different depending on the number of games in the favorable zone AG. In this way, for example, as in the first embodiment, when the player understands the current mode transition table from the table notification performance for the mode transition table, it is possible to play in limited play until the game in which the previously acquired AT counter is likely to become the corresponding information, while taking into account the number of games since the transition to the favorable zone occurred and the number of games since the mode transition table was updated. In other words, it is possible to understand whether the AT counter is likely to become the corresponding information from the AT counter and the number of games acquired in advance, and it is possible to realize an innovative gameplay in which the player is allowed to play in limited play until the game becomes the corresponding information.

Here, the number of games in the advantageous zone can be grasped by the presence or absence of the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator. However, in this slot machine 10, since the advantageous zone transition game and the display start game of the eighth display segment N8 do not match (the display starts when the AT mode is switched), it is difficult to grasp the number of games after the advantageous zone transition. Therefore, it can be said that the number of games itself is difficult to understand when switching between limited play and allowed play by utilizing the relationship between the number of games after the advantageous zone transition (the number of games since the mode transition table is set) and the AT counter obtained in advance as described above. By doing so, it becomes difficult to clearly identify the timing at which to switch between limited play and allowed play, which increases the fun of the game of determining the timing of the switch and also increases the attention to the special notification suggesting the lottery mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the mode transition table is updated every specified number of games (100 games) after the transition to the advantageous zone. Therefore, even if a mode transition table that is not desirable for the player is set, there is a chance that the mode transition table will be updated to a different mode transition table from the undesirable one once the specified number of games have been played, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game will be terminated just because the undesirable mode transition table has been set.

Here, the mode transition table is updated for each predetermined game in the AT lottery process under the condition that the game is permissible and not restricted. By doing this, even if restricted play is being performed because of an undesirable mode transition table, it is necessary to switch to permissible play at least if the mode transition table is to be updated. By doing this, it is possible to preferably avoid a situation where the total number of inserted medals decreases as a result of endless play being performed in restricted play.

Since the special notification indicating the lottery mode is more likely to occur as the number of updates of the mode transition table increases, it can be said that the configuration is such that the more the number of games after transition to the advantageous section is, the more likely the special notification is to occur. By doing this, it is possible to use the special notification to let people understand the lottery mode, and then encourage them to switch between restricted games and allowed games, increasing the probability of winning the AT mode transition. It becomes possible to suitably realize the utilized ceiling function.

<Modification 1>
In this embodiment, the contents of the first AT mode shift lottery table and the second AT mode shift lottery table are different from those of the second embodiment. Fig. 99 shows each AT mode shift lottery table in this modified example.

As shown in FIG. 99, when comparing the first AT mode transition lottery table and the second AT mode transition lottery table, the lottery results associated with AT counter values 1 to 4 and 5 to 8 are different. The lottery results associated with other AT counter values of 9 to 128 are common. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 99(a), in the first AT mode transition lottery table, if the value of the AT counter is 1 to 4, the lottery results excluding duplicate 1-card combinations, BB1, and BB2 For example, if the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the value of the AT counter is 5 to 8, if it is a specific combination, the AT mode transition lottery is won. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99(b), in the second AT mode transition lottery table, when the value of the AT counter is 1 to 4, if it is a specific combination, the AT mode transition lottery is won; When the value of the AT counter is 5 to 8, if the lottery result excludes duplicate 1-card combinations, BB1, and BB2, the AT mode transition lottery is won.

In other words, in this modified example, although the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is the same in the first mode and the second mode, in the first mode it is easy to win when the AT counter value is 1 to 4, and in the second mode it is easy to win. In this case, it is easy to win if the AT counter value is between 5 and 8. Therefore, although the probability that the AT counter value (corresponding information) will be a winning result for a game's lottery result differs depending on the lottery mode, the winning probability for the AT mode transition lottery for each game is the same and the same. This means that Therefore, formally, while keeping the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery unchanged in each game, the AT counter that has been acquired in advance, the transition of the lottery mode, and the switching between restricted games and allowed games are used. In this way, it is possible to substantially change the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery in each game.

<Modification 2>
FIG. 100(a) is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing in this modification. As already explained, the random number acquisition process is a process that is executed when all the reels are stopped in the reel control process.

In step S4501, it is determined whether there is a vacant area in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106g. If there is a vacant area and an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, the AT counter acquisition process is executed in steps S4502 to S4504, and then the random number acquisition process is ended. The processing from step S4502 to step S4504 is similar to the processing from step S3204 to step S3206 described above. If there is no free area and a negative determination is made in step S4501, the random number acquisition process is directly terminated.

As already explained, when the number of bets is a specified number depending on the gaming state, the random number shift process is executed at the start of the game, and basically the tenth storage area RE10 becomes an empty area. The case where a negative determination is made in step S4501 means, for example, that the number of bets in a game started in a situation where information corresponding to the AT counter is stored in the tenth storage area RE10 is not a specified number according to the gaming state. This is a case where the random number shift process is not executed at the start of the game.

In contrast, for example, if information corresponding to the AT counter is not stored in the tenth memory area RE10, the number of bets on the started game is in a limited state that is not a specific prescribed number according to the game status, and even if the random number shift process was not executed when the game started, a positive judgment is made in step S4501.

As already explained, in this slot machine 10, when the reset switch 72 is operated upon power-on and the process for setting the winning probability in the main process is executed, the initialization process of the RAM 106 is performed. In this case, the information corresponding to each AT counter stored in the lottery information storage area 106g is also cleared. In other words, immediately after the process for setting the winning probability is executed, no AT counters are stored in the lottery information storage area 106g, and the AT mode transition lottery is not performed at least for the first game.

On the other hand, with the above configuration, the game after the winning probability setting process is played as a 2-bet game, so that it is possible to correspond to the AT counter without digesting the information corresponding to the AT counter. This makes it possible to only obtain information. This makes it possible to quickly resolve the situation where the information corresponding to the AT counter in the lottery information storage area 106g is not stored.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the second BB winning flag can also be cleared when the RAM 106 is initialized, etc., when playing normal play in a situation in which the second BB winning has been carried over, it is necessary to wait for the second BB winning by playing several two-bet games. In this regard, with the above configuration, it becomes possible to obtain information corresponding to the AT counter even while waiting for the second BB winning, which simplifies the preparation work for normal play.

Note that the situation in which the AT counter stored in the lottery information storage area 106g is deleted is not limited to the initialization process accompanying the winning probability setting process, but for example, the situation in which the AT counter stored in the lottery information storage area 106g is deleted is not limited to the initialization process that accompanies the winning probability setting process. A configuration may also be adopted in which the AT counter is erased during the initialization process. Even in this case, it is possible to use the fact that the AT mode transition lottery is not performed in the normal section and the AT counter is not consumed to accumulate the AT counter by only acquiring the AT counter.

FIG. 100(b) shows a permissible state in which the number of bets is a specified specified number according to the gaming state and execution of processing related to the instruction function is permitted, a restricted state in which the number of bets is not a specified specified number, and a state related to the AT mode transition lottery. The relationship between whether or not each process is executed is compared between a situation immediately after the RAM 106 is initialized and a situation where it is not.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the first mode and the second mode as the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery are defined by the mode transition table and the number of advantageous section games AG, and the lottery mode is as follows: It is possible to transition to either the permissive state or the restricted state. The fact that such a transition to the lottery mode occurs in any state remains the same even immediately after the RAM 106 is initialized. However, since the advantageous section flag is cleared by initializing the RAM 106, the lottery mode is shifted to the advantageous section.

On the other hand, the random number shift process, which is one process in the lottery result corresponding process, is executed in the permissive state, but not in the restricted state. Regardless of whether or not the RAM 106 is immediately initialized, the random number shift process is similarly executed in the allowable state, but not in the restricted state.

The random number acquisition process, which is one process in the reel control process, is executed in the permitted state but is not executed in the restricted state. However, if there is an empty area in the lottery information storage area 106g, such as immediately after the initialization of the RAM 106 as described above, the process for acquiring the AT counter in the random number acquisition process is executed even in the restricted state. In this way, it is possible to resolve the situation where information corresponding to the AT counter is not stored, as described above.

Moreover, in this slot machine 10, the AT counter is configured to be updated by the timer update process (step S108) of the timer interrupt process, and the AT counter update is performed not only in the permitted state or the restricted state, but also regardless of whether the RAM 106 has been initialized or not. In this way, even in the restricted state immediately after the initialization of the RAM 106, the AT counter can be acquired, but the acquired AT counter does not remain unupdated. Therefore, an event will not occur in which the results of the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter acquired in that situation are all the same (either both winning or both non-winning), and it is possible to prevent players or game halls from suffering undue disadvantage.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, the present invention is not limited to the description of each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples, or may be applied to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples in a combined form or in part or in whole. In addition, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of the embodiments and the modified examples, or may be applied in a combined form or in part or in whole.

(1) In the first embodiment, the advantageous zone is ended when the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is not won. However, the advantageous zone may not be ended even when the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is not won. In this case, taking into consideration the upper limit game number of the advantageous zone (1500 games) and the upper limit increase number of the advantageous zone (2400 coins), the advantageous zone may be ended by not winning the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger at a specific number of games (e.g., 950 games) obtained by subtracting the number of games until the specific trigger occurs from the number of games (e.g., 1000 games) that would reach the upper limit increase number before the upper limit game number is reached if the AT mode is transitioned to.

(2) In a configuration in which the transition between the first mode and the second mode is performed via an AT lottery mode transition lottery process, the trigger results and winning probabilities for each lottery mode transition are not limited to those described above. For example, the transition from the second mode to the first mode may be caused by not only a normal role but also a specific role, and the transition from the first mode to the second mode may be caused only by a specific role.

(3) Transition to lottery mode Although the configuration has been described in which the execution of a lottery is restricted in restricted games, it may also be configured to be restricted in permitted games as well. For example, if a specific winning combination is won in the second mode, if the execution of the lottery mode transition lottery is restricted for a predetermined number of games, the transition from the second mode to the first mode during the predetermined number of games is configured. The shift to the second mode is restricted, and it becomes possible to maintain the second mode as an allowed game. In this case, the predetermined number of games may be different depending on the type of specific combination. For example, for Cherry A, the transition lottery between 5 games is limited, and for Cherry B, the transition lottery between 10 games is limited. For example, the transition lottery may be restricted over a longer number of games for a specific combination that is less likely to be won as a lottery result of a game.

On the other hand, when the regular winning combination is won in the first mode, the execution of the lottery for transitioning to the lottery mode may be restricted for a predetermined number of games.

(4) In the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity, the probability of winning is uniform (10% in the first mode, 60% in the second mode) without taking into account the lottery results of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held. However, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery may be different depending on the lottery result of the game and the type of lottery mode in which the player is staying.

(5) The lottery mode may be taken into consideration in the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific role before the specific trigger. In other words, the lottery mode may be configured such that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery for the same specific role if the lottery mode at the time of winning the specific role is the second mode than if it is the first mode.

(6) Even before the specific trigger, the AT mode transition lottery is held if a specific role is won, but the AT mode transition lottery may also be held if a normal role is won.

(7) Although the first BB is provided as a BB that can be won in a 3-bet game and the second BB is provided as a BB that can be won in a 2-bet game, it is also possible to have only one of the BBs. For example, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the second BB is won in a 2-bet game and neither BB is won in a 3-bet game.

(8) Although the configuration is such that the second BB is won in a two-bet game, it may be possible to win multiple types of BB in a two-bet game, for example, it may be possible to win both the first BB and the second BB in a two-bet game. In this case, it may be possible to win both the first BB and the second BB in a two-bet game, and in a three-bet game, neither the first BB nor the second BB is won, and furthermore, in a three-bet game, neither the first BB nor the second BB is won. Note that the relationship between the two-bet game and the three-bet game may be reversed from that described above.

(9) Although the same lottery table is used in both the first BB state and the second BB state to provide the same game base, different lottery tables may be used to provide different game bases. Even in this case, it is advantageous to have a configuration in which the contribution rate to the execution rate of the special notification is varied by varying the value added to the opportunity through counter when the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is not won. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the lower the degree (gaming base), the larger the value is added to the opportunity through counter.

(10) The first BB state and the second BB state are configured to be played as either a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game, but the number of bets may differ depending on the type of BB state, for example, the first BB state may be played as a 3-bet game and the second BB state may be played as a 2-bet game.

(11) The games in the first BB state and the second BB state are both restricted games, but for example, the games in the first BB state are restricted games, while the games in the second BB state are permitted games. The restricted games and allowed games may be configured to differ depending on the type of BB state. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a CB state, an SB state, and an MB state are provided, and any or all of these become a restricted game or a permitted game.

(12) The game base in the BB state is set to be higher than the game base in a 2-bet game, but the game base in the BB state only needs to be higher than the game base in a 3-bet game, and may be lower than the game base in a 2-bet game.

(13) In the configuration in which the first mode and the second mode are defined in the mode transition table, the number of unit games in which switching between the first mode and the second mode occurs is mainly set as 10 games, but for example, The number of unit games at which switching between the first mode and the second mode occurs may be different, such as the number of advantageous section games AG being 1 to 10, 11 to 13, 14 to 55, etc. In this case, the number of unit games for switching may be configured such that different numbers of unit games are repeated, such as the first number, the second number, the first number, the second number, etc., and there is no regularity in the combination of the number of unit games. It is better to have it as such.

(14) In a configuration in which the first mode and the second mode are defined in the mode transition table, the number of unit games in which switching between the first mode and the second mode occurs may vary depending on the type of the mode transition table. . For example, in the first mode transition table (mode transition table with address information MAAAA), the lottery mode is switched at the first number (10 games) of unit games, while in the second mode transition table (address information MBBBB In the mode transition table), the lottery mode may be switched at the second number (25 games) of unit games. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that switching occurs for each game, such as the first mode for even-numbered games and the second mode for odd-numbered games.

(15) Although the first mode has a low probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery and the second mode has a high probability of winning, it is sufficient that the second mode is superior to the first mode. For example, In the first mode, it may be configured such that the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity is not won.

(16) Although the lottery mode is suggested by the occurrence rate of a special notification suggesting the second mode, it is sufficient that the notification is capable of predicting whether the user is in the first mode or the second mode. For example, the lottery mode may be suggested by the occurrence rate of a special notification suggesting the user is in the first mode.

(17) The configuration is such that multiple types of mode transition tables are provided and the mode transition table to be set is determined by lottery, but even if a uniform mode transition table is used or multiple types are provided, there is no regularity in the mode transition table to be set. It is also possible to have a configuration in which . For example, after the first mode transition table is set, the second mode transition table may be easily set or may be set. By doing so, it becomes possible to predict the lottery mode based on the information in the uniform or previous mode transition table.

(18) The mode transition table may include a mode transition table associated only with the first mode.

(19) Depending on the type of the set mode transition table, the value added to the opportunity through counter when a player does not win the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific opportunity may be changed. For example, when a mode transition table is set that has more games associated with the second mode, the value added to the trigger through counter when AT mode is not won is increased, so that the player's sense of loss is reduced by special notification. It is possible to compensate effectively.

(20) The value added to the opportunity through counter when AT mode is not won is not limited to the information of the game that caused the specific opportunity (number of bets, BB state or not, type of BB state, etc.), but also other information. The value to be added to the trigger through counter may be set using . For example, the value to be added may be set using information about a game that occurred before the specific opportunity occurred. Specifically, if the transition to the BB state occurs before the specific opportunity is reached, the value added to the opportunity through counter is reduced/increased even if the game that caused the specific opportunity is not in the BB state. You can also use it as Alternatively, the value to be added to the opportunity through counter may be set based on the number of decreases/increases of medals until a specific opportunity occurs.

(21) The configuration is such that it is possible to win a specific combination even in a 2-bet game, and the AT mode transition lottery is not performed when a specific combination is won in a 2-bet game, but it may also be configured such that a specific combination is not won in a 2-bet game. . Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which a specific combination can be won even in the BB state, and a configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is not performed when the specific combination is won in the BB state.

(22) Although the configuration is such that the second BB winning cannot be achieved in a three bet game and the first BB winning cannot be achieved in a two bet game, the configuration may be such that the second BB winning is more difficult in a three bet game than in a two bet game, and the configuration may be such that the first BB winning is more difficult in a two bet game than in a three bet game.

(23) Although the configuration is such that the second BB is not won in a 3-bet game and the first BB is not won in a 2-bet game, the configuration may be such that the second BB is more difficult to win in a 3-bet game than in a 2-bet game, and the configuration may be such that the first BB is more difficult to win in a 2-bet game than in a 3-bet game.

(24) When the first credit input switch 56 is operated, if the number of credits is less than the value set in the MAX bet counter, the configuration may be such that no bet is made, or even if the number of credits is less than the MAX bet counter. A configuration may also be adopted in which bets are made according to the number of credits. However, if you do the latter, there is a high possibility that a restricted game will be played unintentionally, so it is preferable to configure the former so that bets are not placed when the number of credits does not reach the MAX bet counter. .

(25) When the MAX bet counter is set to 3, it is possible to set 2 bets by operating the second credit input switch 57 or other operation parts, and the MAX bet counter is set to 2. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which it is possible to set a 3 bet by operating the second credit input switch 57 or other operation parts.

(26) An operation unit capable of setting 1 bet may be provided. In this case, the number of bets may be varied depending on the number of times the operation unit is operated. Specifically, one operation of the operation unit may result in one bet, two operations may result in two bets, and three operations may result in three bets. Furthermore, even if the desired number of bets is exceeded, the desired number of bets may be set by operating the operation unit again, such that four operations result in one bet, and five operations result in two bets.

(27) The special notification as a suggestion of the lottery mode may not be executed in games that have won replays (games that have won replays), or may be configured to be more difficult to execute than games with other winning results or games with losing results. good. By winning a replay, it is necessary to play the next game with the same number of bets, but if the number of bets for the next game is determined based on the special notification of the game that has won the replay, This is because the configuration does not allow switching even if one attempts to do so.

(28) Although the gameplay has been described in which the lottery mode is shifted to the second mode before a specific trigger occurs, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined number of points can be awarded in each game until the specific trigger occurs, and a lottery for shifting to the AT mode based on the specific trigger is held according to the points. The predetermined number of points may be awarded according to the lottery results of the game. It is also preferable that the predetermined number of points is awarded in permitted games such as 3-bet games, while the predetermined number of points is not awarded in restricted games such as 2-bet games.

(29) Although the above description is based on a configuration in which a lottery for transitioning to an AT mode is conducted based on a specific trigger, the lottery conducted based on a specific trigger is not limited to a lottery for transitioning to an AT mode. For example, it may be a lottery for transitioning to a favorable zone, a lottery for transitioning to a special zone for adding extras during the AT mode, or a lottery for adding extras to the AT mode or a lottery for the number of games to be added. Furthermore, it may be a lottery for the execution of a predetermined effect (for example, a setting value suggestion effect).

(30) In a configuration in which a random number for a lottery is obtained in advance and a lottery is performed using the random number and the lottery results of each game, an AT counter used for the AT mode transition lottery is used as an example of a random number for the lottery. Although described above, each of the above inventions may be applied to random numbers used in other lotteries. For example, it may be applied to a configuration in which a counter for a lottery used in a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous zone is acquired in advance, or it may be applied to a configuration in which a counter for a lottery used in a lottery for transitioning to an additional special zone is acquired in advance. However, it may be applied to a configuration in which a lottery counter used for a top-up lottery or a lottery for the number of top-up games is acquired in advance, or a lottery counter used for a lottery for a predetermined performance (for example, a set value suggestion performance) is acquired in advance. It may be applied to the configuration to be acquired.

In other words, the specific event, the occurrence of which is determined by lottery based on specific information (random numbers) obtained in advance, is not limited to a transition to an AT mode, but may also be a transition to an advantageous zone, a transition to a specialized zone, an addition of the number of games, an addition of a predetermined number of games (a large or small number of added games), or the occurrence of a predetermined effect.

(31) Although the AT counter was configured to be acquired as a lottery random number used in the AT mode transition lottery at the time of the third stop OFF operation among the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44, it may be configured to be acquired at other timings. Good too. For example, it may be during the first stop OFF operation, the second stop OFF operation, or the first to third stop ON operations. Further, it may be configured to be acquired based on the operation of the start lever 41, or it may be configured to be acquired based on the operation of the credit input switches 56 to 58. These operations may be valid operations that cause the game to proceed based on the operations, or may be configured to be acquired based on invalid operations such as during a period in which the operations are invalidated. Further, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the data is acquired immediately based on the operation, but may be configured to be acquired after a predetermined period of time based on the operation, or when the middle stop switch 43 is operated after the left stop switch 42 is operated. may be obtained by a combination of a plurality of operations, for example, the information may be obtained by a combination of a plurality of operations, such as when the left stop switch 42 is operated and then the right stop switch 44 is operated.

(32) When acquiring an AT counter in the random number acquisition process, the AT counter is configured to be acquired independently of the lottery result of the game at the time of acquisition, without being influenced by the lottery result of the game at the time of acquisition. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the AT counters obtained can be different based on the lottery results of the game. For example, if the lottery result of the game is the first result such as Strong Cherry, an AT counter with a value of 1 from "1" to "64" is acquired as the first numerical range, and the lottery result of the game is If the second result is a strong watermelon, etc., an AT counter with a value of 1 from "65" to "128" is obtained as the second numerical range, depending on the lottery result of the game. A configuration may be adopted in which the numerical value to be acquired is specified.

Furthermore, the type of AT counter to be acquired may be different depending on the lottery mode. For example, in the first mode, an AT counter with a value of 1 from "1" to "128" is acquired as the first numerical range, while in the second mode, the AT counter has a value of "1" to "64" as the second numerical range. '' may be configured such that an AT counter having a value of 1 is acquired. In this case, the superiority of the second mode over the first mode may be set based on the numerical range of the acquired AT counter.

(33) A 3-bet game played with the 2nd BB won in the 2-bet game carried over was explained as a normal game, but a 2-bet game played with the 1st BB won in the 3-bet game carried over. The game may be a normal game, or the second bet game or the third bet game, which is played without carrying over the first BB or the second BB, may be the normal game. Furthermore, a 2-bet game played with the second BB carried over may be used as a normal game, or a 3-bet game played with the first BB carried over as a normal game.

(34) Although the first and second modes are provided as the lottery modes for the AT mode transition lottery, there may be more than one type of lottery mode, and there may be three or more types.

(35) The ball output rate changes depending on each setting value, with setting 1 having the lowest ball output rate and setting 6 having the highest ball output rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease in the amount changes. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the ball payout rates for some setting values are the same and the ball payout rates for other setting values are different, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate. Further, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high rate of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out. In addition, settings 1 and 5 increase the number of balls in a short period of time and decrease the number of balls in a long period of time, while settings 2, 3, and 4 take a longer time to increase the number of balls than in settings 1 and 5. It takes a shorter time than settings 1 and 5 to reduce the predetermined amount, and setting 6 may have a configuration in which almost no increase or decrease in the number of balls produced occurs. In these cases, the ball payout rate for each set value may be the same.

(36) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration and may be, for example, a slot machine having five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel. From the viewpoint of preventing erroneous operations when stopping the reels, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, although a slot machine in which the number of active lines is set to one when the number of bets is three has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration and may be, for example, five active lines.

(37) Although a specific example of a slot machine 10 has been shown, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine. In other words, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions of a slot machine, the present invention may be a gaming machine that has a ball insertion and ball payout function like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel gaming machine). If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only balls as gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value, and restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

(38) In the above embodiment, an example was given of a gaming machine in which a game can be started by inserting medals as gaming media, setting the number of bets, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out as a bonus corresponding to winning the game. However, this does not deny medal-less gaming machines that do not use medals. In such medal-less gaming machines, for example, a configuration may be used in which a game can be started by setting the number of bets for a game using virtual gaming media (a predetermined gaming value), and virtual gaming media (a predetermined gaming value) corresponding to the predetermined number of medals is awarded as a bonus corresponding to winning the game. In this case, the number of virtual gaming media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual gaming media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

The above-mentioned pachinko machines may be not only pachinko machines that dispense game balls, but also sealed-in type pachinko machines in which game balls are not discharged outside the machine. In such sealed-in type pachinko machines, it is preferable to configure the machine to notify information indicating the number of winning balls, for example.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A game start means (a function for executing the processes of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101) for starting a game based on a start operation by a player;
A game ending means (a function for executing the processes of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) for ending the game based on an ending operation by the player;
A game number grasping means for grasping the number of games played from a predetermined start trigger (a game that transitions to an advantageous zone) (a function for executing a process for grasping the number of games played in the advantageous zone AG by the main control device 101);
A grant determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) that can execute a grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player when a predetermined determination opportunity (specific opportunity) occurs in which the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means becomes a specific number;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode) that awards a bonus to a player based on the result of the awarding determination by the awarding determination means being a bonus corresponding result corresponding to awarding a bonus to the player;
Equipped with
A high-imparting state (second mode) in which the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is likely to be the grant corresponding result, and a low-imparting state (first mode) in which the result is less likely or not likely to be the grant corresponding result than the high-imparting state are set,
A first transition means (a function of executing a process of clearing a first mode flag by the main control device 101) for transitioning from the low-power-imparting state to the high-power-imparting state when a predetermined first transition trigger is established;
A second transition means (a function of executing a process of setting a first mode flag by the main control device 101) for transitioning from the high-power-imparting state to the low-power-imparting state when a predetermined second transition trigger is established;
Equipped with
A first game (e.g., a three-bet game) in which the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger may occur, and a second game (e.g., a two-bet game) in which the occurrence of the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger is restricted are set as games to be started by the game starting means;
A gaming machine, characterized in that the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means includes the number of games of the first game and the number of games of the second game.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine such as a so-called slot machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player and is ended based on an end operation by a player, the number of games played from a predetermined start opportunity is a specific number. When this happens, a predetermined decision trigger has occurred, and a decision is made as to whether or not to grant a benefit to the player, and the result of the award decision is a high award state that is likely to result in a grant response result and a grant response result. Since a low awarding state is set, the awarding rate of the benefit differs depending on which awarding state the awarding determination is made in, thereby diversifying the game. In such a configuration, although the transition between the high grant state and the low grant state occurs in the first game, it does not occur in the second game, so the transition to the high grant state in the first game is in order to obtain the benefit. It becomes a shortcut. In addition, the number of games for generating the determination trigger that triggers the award determination described above includes both the number of games of the first game and the number of games of the second game. Therefore, for example, if a shift to a high award state occurs in the first game, it is possible to realize a game in which the high award state is maintained in the second game and waits until a decision opportunity for award determination occurs. can. By doing so, while utilizing the configuration in which the first game and the second game exist as games that are started by the player's start operation, the player can adjust the situation such as the granting state and whether or not a determination opportunity has been established. It becomes possible to realize an interesting game in which the player can select which game to play depending on the situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the above-mentioned "high grant state" may be expressed as a "first state", and the "low grant state" may be expressed as a "second state". In this case, the "second mode" shown in the first embodiment above corresponds to the "first state", and the "first mode" corresponds to the "second state". Furthermore, the "first transition opportunity" may be expressed as a "first transition condition," and the "second transition opportunity" may be expressed as a "second transition condition." These changes in representation can also be applied to other features or groups of features.

Feature A2. In the first game, execution of the grant determination by the grant determination means based on the determination trigger is permitted, while in the second game, execution of grant determination by the grant determination means based on the determination trigger is restricted. The gaming machine according to feature A1.

According to the above configuration, for example, after a judgment trigger occurs in the second game, it becomes necessary to switch to the first game in order to receive a prize judgment. In this way, in a series of games in which a high prize state is transitioned in the first game and then switched to the second game, a judgment trigger occurs in the second game and then switched back to the first game, not only is the gameplay of determining the timing to switch to the second game added, but so is the gameplay of determining the timing to switch to the first game, further increasing the interest of the game.

Feature A3. The gaming machine described in Feature A1 or Feature A2, characterized in that the award determination means is configured to execute the award determination in the first game after the game count determination means determines that the specific number has been reached.

According to the above configuration, even if the game that has reached the specific number is the second game, by subsequently switching to the first game, the award determination is performed in the switched game. In this way, even if the game progresses while maintaining the high grant state in the second game, it will be made clear that the grant determination will be made by switching to the first game, for example, It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the award determination not being made if the game to be played is the second game or the award determination not being made for a long time after switching to the first game.

Feature A4. Features A1 to A3 are characterized in that the first transition opportunity and the second transition opportunity are not established after the number of games executed from the predetermined start opportunity reaches the specific number. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, if the game moves to the high award state before the number of executions reaches a specific number, the game will not shift to the low award state in subsequent games. On the contrary, if the game does not shift to the high award state by the time the number of executions reaches a specific number, it will not shift to the high award state in subsequent games and will have to undergo award determination in the low award state. Therefore, the key to the game is how the specific number is reached in a high award state, and the degree of attention to the game up to the specific number can be dramatically increased.

Moreover, for example, if the above configuration is applied to feature A2, when a player transitions to a high award state in the first game, then switches to the second game, and after a specific number is reached, switches back to the first game to receive an award judgment, it is possible to avoid transitioning from a high award state to a low award state. In this way, it is possible to more suitably realize an innovative game in which a player transitions to a high award state in the first game, then maintains that high award state in the second game while reaching a specific number, and receives an award judgment in the first game.

Feature A5. Based on the establishment of a predetermined notification opportunity (winning a special notification lottery), a special notification corresponding to the high grant state or the low grant state can be executed by a predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that it is equipped with a special notification means (a function for executing special notification processing by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to determine whether the current grant determination state is a high grant state or a low grant state by the special notification. As a result, it is possible to suitably perform a game in which the first game shifts to a high award state and then switches to the second game to reach a specific number.

Note that the "notification trigger" may also be expressed as "notification condition."

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the notification trigger is established on the condition that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is not the grant corresponding result.

According to the above configuration, when the result of the award determination by the award determination means is not a result corresponding to the award, a special notification is executed as compensation for the fact that the bonus was not awarded. As a result, it becomes easier to play a game that predicts a transition to a high award state, and the award determination is more likely to be executed in a high award state. Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively follow up on the decrease in the player's motivation to play when the result corresponding to the award is not reached.

Feature A7. As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the awarding of the privilege by the privilege awarding means is permitted, and a normal state (normal section) in which the awarding of the privilege by the privilege awarding means is restricted. Ori,
When the specific state ends and transitions to the normal state, initialization means (initialization processing of advantageous section information performed by the main controller 101) that executes initialization processing of various information used in the specific state; function),
This gaming machine is
A first control device (main control device 101) having at least the provision determination means and the initialization means, and a second control device (display control device 81) having at least the special notification means,
The second control device is configured to store specific information (the consecutive number of times the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger was not won) used for determining the success or failure of the notification trigger, across the specific state (a storage means (trigger)). The gaming machine according to feature A5 or feature A6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a through counter).

According to the above configuration, the grant determination means makes a grant determination, and a specific state in which a benefit can be granted and a normal state in which the grant of the benefit is restricted are set, and when transitioning from the specific state to the normal state, Since the various information used in the specific state is initialized, the information in the specific state will not be carried over to the normal state, and assuming that the game will start from the normal state, Fairness among players at the start is ensured. On the other hand, in an attempt to ensure fairness in this way, there is a high possibility that the game will be terminated when the specific state ends, and there is a concern that the operating rate of the gaming machine will decrease. Therefore, while assuming that the initialization process is performed at the end of a specific state as described above, the specific Since information can be stored across specific states, the special notification makes it possible to associate each specific state. Thereby, it becomes possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game across the specific state, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Feature A8. The notification trigger is established on the condition that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is not the grant response result,
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the specific information is information corresponding to the number of times the grant determination did not result in the grant corresponding result.

According to the above configuration, the result of the award determination by the award determination means does not become the award corresponding result, and the special notification is executed as compensation for the fact that the benefit was not awarded. As a result, it becomes easier to play a game that determines the transition to the high award state, and it becomes easier to perform award determination in the high award state. Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively monitor the decline in the player's desire to play when the result does not correspond to the award.

The number of times that the award determination did not result in the awarding of the bonus is then stored across specific states, so that this specific information can be used to realize a so-called ceiling function for the awarding of the bonus across multiple specific states.

Feature A9. The special notification means provides, as the special notification corresponding to the high award state or the low award state, a situation in which it is more advantageous for the player to play the second game than to play the first game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A8, characterized in that it is possible to notify that the

According to the above configuration, instead of directly informing the player of a high or low award state, the player is informed that playing the second game is more advantageous to the player than playing the first game, and that the player is in a situation in which the second game should be played. This makes it possible to give the player a strong impression that he or she has succeeded in maintaining the high award state through his or her own operation, and has won the award-corresponding result. This makes it possible to favorably increase attention to the game.

Feature A10. A plurality of setting values are set that can cause changes in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of game media, and a setting means (main controller 101) sets one of the plurality of setting values. function to set the winning probability),
The notification trigger is established in the case where the first set value is set by the setting means and the case where the second set value different from the first set value is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A9, characterized in that the ease of playing is different.

According to the above configuration, a set difference is set for the execution rate of special notifications. In this way, by using special notifications corresponding to high and low award states, it is possible to change the rate and pattern of increase/decrease in gaming media, which contributes to diversifying games.

Feature A11. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A5 to A10, characterized in that the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification at a timing later than the transition timing of the first transition means to transition to the high payout state or the second transition means to transition to the low payout state in a single game.

According to the above configuration, after the transition from the low award state to the high award state or from the high award state to the low award state in one game, the special notification is executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine whether the next game will be the first game or the second game based on the special notification. In other words, if the order of the above-mentioned transition and notification is reversed, and the configuration is such that the transition of the granting state can occur after the special notification, it would be difficult to switch to the first game or the second game based on the special notification. Nevertheless, there may be an inconvenience that the game following the special notification is in a different granting state from the one indicated by the special notification. On the other hand, by adopting the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to suitably perform a game using special notification without causing such inconvenience.

Feature A12. The first transition opportunity is established based on the game result of the first game,
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, characterized in that the second transition trigger is established based on the game result of the first game.

According to the above configuration, since a shift between a high award state and a low award state occurs based on the game result of the first game, the transition to the award state is predicted from the game result of the first game, and the shift is made to the second game. It becomes possible to realize a game that causes switching. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game result of the first game is dramatically increased.

Feature A13. If the game result of the first game is a predetermined first game result (specific combination), the first transition opportunity may be established, while the second transition opportunity may be established more than the first transition opportunity. If the configuration is difficult, and the game result of the first game is a second game result different from the first game result (for example, normal reply A to normal reply C), the second transition opportunity may be established. On the other hand, the gaming machine according to feature A12, wherein the first transition opportunity is configured to be less likely to occur than the second transition opportunity.

According to the above configuration, if the game result of the first game is the first game result, the first transition trigger occurs and it is easy to transition to a high award state, and if the game result is the second game result, the second transition trigger occurs and it is easy to transition to a low award state, so the player plays while hoping that the game result will be the first game result, and plays while hoping that it will not be the second game result. In this case, since the second transition trigger may occur if the game result is the first game result, and the first transition trigger may occur if the game result is the second game result, it is possible to predict to some extent which award state the player will be in depending on both game results, but this is not determined. In this way, it is possible to increase the fun of predicting the award state and to increase the interest in the first game.

Feature A14. The award determining means determines that the game result of the game is a predetermined specific result (specific combination) in a game before the number of games grasping means recognizes that the number of games has reached the specific number. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, characterized in that, in some cases, the award determination can be executed.

According to the above configuration, even if the number of plays has not yet reached a specific number, if the play result is a specific result, a determination to award the prize can be made. By doing this, the gameplay leading up to the specific number does not become sluggish, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature A15. The grant determination means is capable of executing the grant determination if the game whose game result is the specific result is the first game, but is restricted from executing the grant determination if the game is the second game. The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized in that the gaming machine has a configuration in which the specific result is not obtained in the second game.

According to the above configuration, if a specific result is achieved in the first game, a determination is made as to whether or not a prize will be awarded. However, even if a specific result is achieved in the second game, a determination is not made as to whether or not a specific result will be achieved in the first game, and this can serve as a motivation for playing the first game. In this way, it is possible to play a game in which a specific result is achieved, rather than simply waiting for a high prize state to be achieved in the first game, and the entertainment value of the game is further increased.

Feature A16. The first transition opportunity occurs when the number of games played from the predetermined start opportunity becomes the first transition number, and the second transition opportunity occurs when the number of games played from the predetermined start opportunity becomes the second transition number. Transition number information storage means (various table storage area of ROM 105 of main controller 101 105a) and
Selection means for selecting one transition number information from the transition number information stored in the transition number information storage means based on the predetermined start opportunity (execution of advantageous section transition game processing by the main controller 101) function) and
Transition opportunity determining means (based on the main controller 101) capable of determining whether or not the game corresponds to the establishment of the first transition opportunity and the second transition opportunity based on the transition number information selected by the selection means. A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with: a function of executing a process of making a mode determination based on a mode transition table.

According to the above configuration, the occurrence of a transition trigger between both of the granted states is determined by the transition number information and the number of games played, so it is possible for the gaming machine to grasp the transition of the granted state in advance. In this way, compared to a configuration in which the transition condition is established based on the game results of each game as in feature A12, the configuration for determining the occurrence of a transition trigger in each game is overwhelmingly simple, and it is also possible to notify in advance, for example, how long it will take for the transition trigger to occur. Therefore, the configuration is simplified and interest is increased in realizing gameplay using both of the granted states.

Feature A17. The gaming machine described in Feature A16, characterized in that the transition trigger determination means is capable of determining whether or not a game corresponds to the establishment of the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger based on the number of games grasped by the number of games grasp means and the transition number information.

According to the above configuration, the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means is the total number of games in the first game and the second game. Therefore, in a configuration in which both grant states are transitioned using the transition number information, even if the second game is being played, it is possible to determine whether the current number of games corresponds to the occurrence of the first transition trigger or the second transition trigger. In other words, even if the first transition trigger or the second transition trigger does not actually occur in the second game and the grant state does not transition, it is possible to determine that the number of games is that number. In this way, it is also possible to notify the player whether it is okay to switch to the first game while he is avoiding the transition of the grant state in the second game. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately improve the interest of the game in which the first game and the second game are switched.

Feature A18. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A17, characterized in that the second game is set to have a higher gaming base, which is the average value of the difference between the gaming value (number of bets) used in the game and the gaming value (number of payouts) awarded as a result of the game, than the first game.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which a player is prompted to transition to a high payout state in the first game and then switch to the second game until a specific number of games is played, it is possible to reduce loss of game value in the second game. Even with this configuration, the transition to a high payout state is restricted in the second game, so the significance of playing the first game is guaranteed.

Feature A19. comprising a bet number setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S205 and S206 by the main controller 101) for setting the number of bets for a game based on an operation by a player;
A game in which a first number of bets (3 bets) is set by the number of bets setting means is the first game,
According to any one of features A1 to A18, the second game is a game in which a second number of bets (2 bets) different from the first number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, the player can switch between the first game and the second game simply by switching the number of bets in the game. By doing so, for example, when switching to the second game when a shift to a high award state occurs, it becomes possible to easily switch the game regardless of the player's skill level in the game.

The invention described in features A1 to A19 above is based on ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. There is a known configuration in which an internal lottery is held and rewards are given to players according to the results of the internal lottery.Specifically, with regard to slot machines, the slot machine starts when medals are bet as gaming media. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating, and if the stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating.Then, the reels stop. If the result corresponds to the result of an internal lottery, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Note that for each configuration of features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, and features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations I1 to I6 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a payout means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first operation result is won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means wins a prize in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a push order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a profit different from the first operation result by operating in an operation mode is set;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, mode notification execution means (main) that can perform mode notification regarding the operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means. (a function of executing press order notification processing by the control device 101),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which it is possible to transition to a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is executable, and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution unit is not executable. (normal section) and are set,
a game number grasping means (number of advantageous period games AG) for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous state;
When the number of games ascertained by the number of games grasping means reaches a specific number, a transition determining means that can execute a transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the specific state (an AT lottery process by the main controller 101) function) and
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (1st BB, 2nd BB), and the game state is specially set based on the fact that the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the valid position. A special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) that transitions to a gaming state and ends the special gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined ending condition;
Equipped with
The number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means includes the number of games played in the special gaming state,
Limiting means capable of restricting the execution of specific processing (processing related to the instruction function) regarding the mode notification, including the transition determination by the transition determination means in the special gaming state (specifying the number of bets by the main controller 101 according to the gaming state) A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing processing for restricting processing related to the instruction function when the specified number is not reached.

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a specific result in which the winning result may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the mode of the stop operation may be notified by the predetermined notification means, so that the mode notification is performed according to the mode notification. By having the player perform the operations, it becomes possible to provide different benefits to the player. In this case, the specific state where mode notification is possible is set so that it can be transferred to an advantageous state, and the mode notification itself is not performed in the normal state, so the advantage of the advantageous state over the normal state is guaranteed. be done. Moreover, this gaming machine is configured such that when the number of games played in an advantageous state reaches a specific number, a transition to the specific state is determined, so interest in the number of games played during the advantageous state is heightened, and the number of games A game feature in which the goal is to reach a specific number is realized.

In addition, in this gaming machine, a special game state is set as a so-called bonus state that changes when the lottery result becomes the transition result and the symbol combination for transition stops at the valid position, and the number of games played during the special game state also changes. Since it is included in the number of games that lead to the above-mentioned specific number, it may be more advantageous for the player to play the advantageous state in the special game state as much as possible. On the other hand, in the special gaming state, execution of specific processing related to mode notification including transition determination is restricted, so for example, depending on the end timing of the special gaming state, transition determination may not be easily performed. There may also be situations where a transition determination is made under unfavorable circumstances.

In this way, in order to earn the number of plays required to make a transition decision to cause a transition to a specific state while in an advantageous state, it can be more advantageous for the player to cause a transition to a special game state, but by configuring the game so that the execution of specific processing related to status notification is restricted unless the timing of the transition to and end of the special game state is determined, gameplay is realized that allows the player to decide whether or not to cause a transition to a special game state while in an advantageous state, and this increases the enjoyment of the game.

Feature B2. A reserve means (a function of executing a process of setting a first BB winning flag or a second BB winning flag by the main control device 101) capable of reserving the transition result information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result when the picture combination for the transition does not stop at the valid position;
The gaming machine described in feature B1 is characterized in that the number of games grasped by the number of games grasp means includes the number of games in a reserved state (internal state) in which the transition result information is reserved in the reservation means.

According to the above configuration, the number of games in a reserved state, which is a situation where the transfer result is a winning result, also contributes to the specific number. By doing so, it is possible to proceed with the game while waiting for transition to the special gaming state in the reserved state until the desired transition timing comes.

Feature B3. comprising a bet number setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S205 and S206 by the main controller 101) for setting the number of bets for a game based on an operation by a player;
The restriction means allows execution of the specific process in a game started with a first bet number (3 bets) set by the bet number setting means, while allowing execution of the specific process when the bet number setting means sets the first bet number (3 bets). is configured such that execution of the specific process can be restricted in a game started with a different second bet number (2 bets) set,
In a game started with the second bet number set by the bet number setting means, the transfer symbol combination may stop at the valid position, while the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the transition symbol combination is set so that it does not stop or is difficult to stop at the effective position in a game that is started.

According to the above configuration, in order to cause a transition to the special game state, it is necessary to switch the bet amount for the game to the second bet amount instead of the first bet amount. In this case, while the execution of the specific process is permitted with the first bet amount, the execution of the specific process is restricted with the second bet amount, so that the execution of the specific process is restricted in the game that is intended to cause a transition to the special game state. In other words, if a game is played with the first bet amount in order to cause the specific process to be executed, a transition to the special game state will not occur, and it is possible to avoid an event in which an unintentional transition to the special game state results in the execution of the specific process being restricted.

Feature B4: Equipped with a bet amount setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S205 and S206 by the main control device 101) for setting the bet amount of the game based on the operation by the player,
the limiting means is configured to permit the execution of the specific process in a game started with a first bet number (3 bets) set by the bet number setting means, while restricting the execution of the specific process in a game started with a second bet number (2 bets) different from the first bet number set by the bet number setting means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that in a game started after the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the result of the lottery by the lottery means can be the transition result, while in a game started after the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the result of the lottery by the lottery means does not become the transition result or is less likely to become the transition result than when the first bet number is set.

According to the above configuration, in order to win the transition result that causes a transition to the special game state, it is necessary to switch the bet amount for the game to the second bet amount instead of the first bet amount. In this case, while the execution of the specific process is permitted with the first bet amount, the execution of the specific process is restricted with the second bet amount, so the execution of the specific process is restricted in the game that is intended to cause a transition to the special game state. In other words, if a game is played with the first bet amount in order to cause the specific process to be executed, it is unlikely that a transition result that could cause a transition to the special game state will be won, so it is possible to prevent an event in which an unintentional transition to the special game state occurs and the execution of the specific process is restricted.

Feature B5. According to any one of features B1 to B4, the number of games executed from the transition to the special gaming state until the end of the special gaming state may be less than the specific number. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if a transition to a special game state occurs, the number of plays does not reach the specific number by itself. For example, if a transition to the special game state occurs shortly after a transition to an advantageous state, a situation may arise in which the specific number has not been reached when the special game state ends. In this way, it is possible to more optimally execute games that time the transition to the special game state, which restricts the execution of specific processing.

Feature B6. According to any one of features B1 to B4, the number of games executed from the time the transition to the special game state occurs until the end of the special game state may be greater than the specific number. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, when a transition to the special game state occurs, the number of plays reaches the specific number. Therefore, for example, if a transition to the special game state occurs shortly after a transition to an advantageous state, the specific number will always be reached when the special game state ends. In this way, it is possible to meet the diverse needs of players, such as when there are circumstances in which the player wishes to restrict the execution of a specific process even before the transition to the special game state.

Feature B7. The special gaming state is a first special gaming state that transitions when the game result becomes the first game result (first BB winning), and a first special gaming state that transitions when the gaming result becomes the second gaming result (second BB winning). A second special gaming state to be entered is set,
The number of games executed from the time the transition to the first special game state occurs until the end of the first special game state may be greater than the specific number;
Any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that the number of games executed from the time the transition to the second special game state occurs until the end of the second special game state may be less than the specific number. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, depending on the type of special gaming state to be transitioned to, there are cases in which it is certain that the specific number will be reached during the special gaming state, and cases where it is not certain that the specific number will be reached during the special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make use of the relationship between the restriction on the execution of specific processing and the specific number, including the type of special gaming state to which the game is transferred, to increase interest.

Feature B8. The gaming machine described in Feature B7, characterized in that the number of plays grasped by the play count grasping means is set to be more advantageous to the player when the specific number is reached in the second special gaming state than when the specific number is reached in the first special gaming state (the number of plays grasped by the play count grasping means is set to be more advantageous to the player when the specific number is reached in the second special gaming state than when the specific number is reached in the first special gaming state (the number of plays grasped by the play count grasping means is set to be more advantageous to the player when the specific number is reached in the second special gaming state than when the specific number is reached in the first special gaming state).

According to the above configuration, the second special gaming state where the number of games can be less than the specific number is more advantageous than the first special gaming state where the number of games can be more than the specific number. , it is more advantageous to reach a specific number by playing at least the normal game state in an advantageous state. By doing so, it is possible to suitably realize a game in which a specific number is reached while combining the normal game state and the special game state.

Feature B9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B8, characterized in that the special gaming state is set to have a higher gaming base, which is the average value of the difference between the gaming value (number of bets) used in the game and the gaming value (number of payouts) awarded as a result of the game, than the normal gaming state.

According to the above configuration, in the special game state, the execution of the specific process is restricted, but instead the game base is set to be high, so it is possible to reach the specific number without requiring a large game value. Therefore, it is possible to preferably realize a game in which a transition judgment to a specific state is made by utilizing the special game state.

Feature B10. Depending on the result of the specific processing executed before the number of games played in the advantageous state reaches the specific number, the transition determination means makes a transition determination based on the fact that the number of games played in the advantageous state reaches the specific number to the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, characterized in that the probabilities of the results corresponding to the transition are different.

According to the above configuration, the result of the specific process executed before the specific number is reached will affect the result of the transition determination executed when the specific number is reached. In this way, it is possible to optimally realize gameplay that allows the specific number to be reached by utilizing the special game state while executing the specific process.

Feature B11. A reserving means (a function of executing a process of setting a first BB winning flag or a second BB winning flag by the main control device 101) capable of reserving the transition result information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result when the picture combination for the transition does not stop at the valid position;
The gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B10, characterized in that the limiting means is equipped with a means (a function of executing a process to set the MAX bet counter to 2 in a non-internal state by the main control unit 101) capable of limiting the execution of the specific process after the special game state ends until the transition result information is reserved in the reservation means.

According to the above configuration, even after the special game state ends, the execution of the specific process is restricted until the transition result information is reserved by the reservation means, so that the execution of the transition judgment based on the specific number included in the specific process is also restricted until the reserved state is reached. In this way, the reserved state is maintained as much as possible, and an event of waiting for the transition result to be won when it is desired to transition to the special game state is avoided, and it is possible to preferably realize gameplay that makes it easier to receive the transition judgment by utilizing the special game state.

The invention described in the above features B1 to B11 was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that for each configuration of the features B1 to B11, features A1 to A19, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, and features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations I1 to I6 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. A game start means (a function for executing the processes of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101) for starting a game based on a start operation by a player;
A game ending means (a function for executing the processes of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) for ending the game based on an ending operation by the player;
When a predetermined judgment opportunity (specific opportunity) occurs, a grant judgment means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) that can execute a grant judgment as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode) that awards a bonus to a player based on the result of the awarding determination by the awarding determination means being a bonus corresponding result corresponding to awarding a bonus to the player;
Equipped with
A high-imparting state (second mode) in which the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is likely to be the grant corresponding result, and a low-imparting state (first mode) in which the result is less likely or not likely to be the grant corresponding result than the high-imparting state are set,
A game number grasping means for grasping the number of games played from a predetermined start trigger (a game that transitions to an advantageous zone) (a function for executing a process for grasping the number of games played in the advantageous zone AG by the main control device 101);
A first transition means (a function of executing a process of clearing a first mode flag by the main control device 101) for transitioning from the low-power-imparting state to the high-power-imparting state when a predetermined first transition trigger is established;
A second transition means (a function of executing a process of setting a first mode flag by the main control device 101) for transitioning from the high-power-imparting state to the low-power-imparting state when a predetermined second transition trigger is established;
a transition number information storage means (various table storage area 105a in the ROM 105 of the main control device 101) capable of storing multiple types of transition number information (mode transition table) of the first transition number and the second transition number, the first transition trigger being generated when the number of games from the specified start trigger becomes a first transition number, and the second transition trigger being generated when the number of games from the specified start trigger becomes a second transition number;
A selection means (a function of executing a process for a game in which the main control device 101 transitions between advantageous zones) selects one piece of transition number information from the transition number information stored in the transition number information storage means based on the predetermined start trigger;
A state determination means (a function of executing a process of performing a mode determination based on a mode transition table by the main control device 101) capable of determining whether a game corresponds to the high award state or the low award state based on the transition number information selected by the selection means and the number of games grasped by the number of games grasped by the number of games grasped by the state determination means;
Equipped with
A first game (e.g., a three-bet game) in which the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger may occur, and a second game (e.g., a two-bet game) in which the occurrence of the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger is restricted are set as games to be started by the game starting means;
A gaming machine, characterized in that the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means includes the number of games of the first game and the number of games of the second game.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine such as a so-called slot machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player and ended based on an end operation, when a predetermined judgment trigger occurs, a judgment is made as to whether or not to grant a bonus to the player, and the result of the judgment is set to a high award state in which the result is likely to be a bonus corresponding result and a low award state in which the result is unlikely to be a bonus corresponding result, so that the bonus award rate differs depending on the award state in which the judgment is made, thereby diversifying the game. In this configuration, a transition between the high award state and the low award state occurs in the first game but not in the second game, so transitioning to the high award state in the first game is a shortcut to obtaining a bonus.

In addition, since the transition between the high grant state and the low grant state is determined by the transition number information and the number of games between the first game and the second game, the gaming machine side must know the transition of the grant state in advance. Even if the second game does not involve a shift in the award status, it will be possible for the gaming machine to understand which award status the current game corresponds to. . In this way, the information grasped by the gaming machine can be notified to the player, and the content of grant determination and other processing can be changed based on the grasped information. For example, it is possible to dramatically improve the gameplay in which a first game in which a transition in the awarding state can occur and a second game in which no transition can occur is set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C2. It is characterized by comprising a special notification means (a function for executing special notification processing by the display control device 81) that can execute a special notification corresponding to the judgment result of the state judgment means by a predetermined notification means. The gaming machine described in feature C1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably switch between the first game and the second game based on the special notification.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the special notification means can execute the special notification even in a situation where the second game is being played.

According to the above configuration, even when playing the second game in which the transition of the awarded state does not occur, the special notification allows the player to know which awarded state the player would be in if the first game were played. This allows the player to determine the timing to switch to the first game by the special notification.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to Feature C2 or Feature C3, wherein the special notification means is configured to facilitate the execution of the special notification when the result of the award determination by the award determination means is a result that is not the award corresponding result.

According to the above configuration, by making it easier to receive a special notification when you do not win the grant determination, it becomes easier to receive the next grant determination in a high grant state, so that you win the grant determination. This makes it possible to easily follow up on the player's disappointment due to not winning the award determination. In this case, it is possible to make it easier to win a grant decision simply by making special announcements, without changing the winning probability of the grant decision or the structure of the trigger for transition to the grant state, even if the grant decision is not won. This makes it possible to compensate for non-winning without making complicated changes to the process, and even for gaming machines where there are circumstances where it is not possible to change the winning probability or transition trigger, etc., such compensation can be made. It becomes possible to do this.

Feature C5. Features C1 to C4 characterized in that a plurality of the first migration numbers or a plurality of the second migration numbers are set in the predetermined migration number information stored in the migration number information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

The above configuration specifies that a plurality of first transition numbers are set in the predetermined transition number information, and that there are a plurality of game plays in which a first transition opportunity from a low award state to a high award state occurs, and there is a transition from the low award state to the high award state, and then after transitioning to the low award state, there may be a further transition to the high award state, or that a plurality of second transition number information is set in the predetermined transition number information, and there are a plurality of game plays in which a second transition opportunity from a high award state to a low award state occurs, and there is a transition from the high award state to the low award state, and then after transitioning to the high award state, there may be a further transition to the low award state. In this way, it is made clear that the low award state and the high award state repeatedly go back and forth, and the fun of switching between the two games while predicting the transition between the two award states can be improved.

Feature C6. When the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means is a predetermined number, transition number information determined by the state determining means to correspond to the high granting state, and transition number information determined by the state determining means to correspond to the low granting state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that each piece of transfer number information is stored in the transfer number information storage means such that there is determined transfer number information.

According to the above configuration, the transition number information is set so that the award state is not determined by the number of plays from a specified starting trigger, so that the fun of predicting which award state will be based on the set transition number information and the number of plays is not diminished.

Feature C7. A specific notification means (a function for executing table notification processing by the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the transition number information selected by the selection means using a predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification allows the player to know which transition number information has been selected, and based on the transition number information thus understood, the player can also know in advance the timing to switch between the first game and the second game. This makes it easier to play a game in which the first game and the second game are switched in relation to the awarded state.

Feature C8. The game according to feature C7, wherein the specific notification means is configured to facilitate execution of the specific notification when the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is not the grant corresponding result. Machine.

According to the above configuration, by making it easier for specific notification to be performed when the award decision is not won, it becomes easier to receive the next award decision in a high award state, and thus winning the award decision. This makes it possible to easily follow up on the player's disappointment due to not winning the award determination. In this case, it is possible to make it easier to win a grant decision just by making specific notifications, without changing the winning probability of the grant decision or the structure of the transition trigger of the grant state even if the grant decision is not won. This makes it possible to compensate for non-winning without making complicated changes to the process, and even for gaming machines where there are circumstances where it is not possible to change the winning probability or transition trigger, etc., such compensation can be made. It becomes possible to do this.

Feature C9. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the second game is more advantageous to the player than the first game.

The above configuration can provide the advantage of switching to the second game. In other words, although the second game does not transition the award state, it is advantageous for the player, so that in a situation where a low award state is predicted, the player can play the advantageous second game, and when a high award state is reached, the player can switch to the first game.

Feature C10. The second game has a higher gaming base than the first game, which is the average value of the deduction between the gaming value (number of bets) used in the game and the gaming value (number of payouts) given as a result of the game. The gaming machine according to feature C9, characterized in that the gaming machine is set to have a high price.

The above configuration is one embodiment of the specific configuration of feature C9. In other words, it is a configuration in which the difference in the degree of advantage between the first game and the second game is embodied by the game base. Furthermore, if a configuration is adopted in which the difference in the degree of advantage between the two games is set by such a game base, it becomes possible to expect the excellent effect of feature C9 with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature C11. Features C1 to C10 characterized in that in the first game, execution of grant determination by the grant determination means is permitted, while in the second game, execution of grant determination by the grant determination means is restricted. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, when switching to the second game, no transfer of the awarded state occurs and no award judgment is made. With such a configuration, the second game is more likely to be seen as a throw-away game in order to receive a favorable award judgment in the first game, and there is a concern that the playability of the second game may decrease. In this regard, as in feature C1, the state judgment means is capable of grasping the transfer of the awarded state in advance and grasping the awarded state in the second game, so that it is possible to more suitably improve the playability of the second game.

Note that the invention described in features C1 to C11 above is based on the following: ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. There is a known configuration in which an internal lottery is held and rewards are given to players according to the results of the internal lottery.Specifically, with regard to slot machines, the slot machine starts when medals are bet as gaming media. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating, and if the stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating.Then, the reels stop. If the result corresponds to the result of an internal lottery, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Note that for each configuration of the above features C1 to C11, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, and features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations I1 to I6 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A game start means (a function of executing the processes of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101) that starts a game based on a start operation by a player;
A game ending means (a function for executing the processes of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) for ending the game based on an ending operation by the player;
When a predetermined judgment opportunity (specific opportunity) occurs, a grant judgment means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) that can execute a grant judgment as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode) that awards a bonus to a player based on the result of the awarding determination by the awarding determination means being a bonus corresponding result corresponding to awarding a bonus to the player;
A benefit setting means (a function of executing a special notification process by the display control device 81) capable of setting the ease of the benefit being awarded by utilizing specific information that the result of the benefit determination by the benefit determination means is not the benefit corresponding result;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the award setting means is capable of changing the ease with which the bonus is awarded between a case in which the specific information is used when the game that triggered the judgment was a first game and a case in which the specific information is used when the game that triggered the judgment was a second game different from the first game.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine such as a slot machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player and ended based on an end operation, when a predetermined judgment trigger occurs, a judgment is made as to whether or not to grant a bonus to the player, and if the result of the award judgment is a loss result that does not correspond to the award of a bonus, the award setting means uses specific information corresponding to the loss result to set the ease of the bonus being awarded, so that a so-called ceiling function can be realized by using the result of the award judgment.

After that, we will consider the ease with which a benefit will be granted when the award decision at that decision opportunity is a wrong result, depending on whether the game that caused the decision opportunity was the first game or the second game. In the settings, the ease with which the benefit is granted is set to be different. By doing this, the ceiling function is realized not only by the result of the grant judgment but also by the game that causes the judgment, and it is possible to diversify the games until reaching the ceiling. becomes.

Feature D2. The probability that the award corresponding result will be obtained in the award determination by the award determination means based on the determination opportunity that occurred in the first game, and the award that will be made by the award determination means based on the determination opportunity that occurred in the second game. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that the probabilities that the determination results in the award corresponding result are the same.

According to the above configuration, if the first game and the second game are judged to be non-winning, the likelihood of a bonus being awarded is set differently by the award setting means, but the winning probability of the award judgment itself is the same. In other words, the only difference between which game triggers the judgment is the contribution to the so-called ceiling. This makes it possible to realize the ceiling function without using a complex configuration such as varying the winning probability by the award judgment means.

In addition, regarding "...probability and...probability are common", "...probability and...probability are the same probability" or "...probability and...probability" . . .probability is approximately the same probability." In this case, "substantially the same probability" does not have to be the exact same probability, but may be a probability difference that is such that the player cannot grasp the difference.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein the first game and the second game can be selected by a selection operation by a player.

According to the above configuration, the player selects the game itself that triggers the determination while assuming that the player does not win the transition determination, and the attention level of the game is improved through active participation in the game. .

Feature D4. In at least one of the first game and the second game, execution of the grant determination by the grant determination means is restricted, while the determination trigger occurs in either the first game or the second game. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, although execution of the award judgment is restricted in at least one of the first game and the second game, the judgment trigger can occur in either the first game or the second game. In other words, after the judgment trigger occurs in the first game or the second game, the award judgment is performed for either the first game or the second game after that, not in the first game or the second game. In this type of gameplay, it is possible to realize an innovative gameplay in which the contribution of the result of the award judgment based on the judgment trigger being a miss to the ceiling differs depending on which game caused the judgment trigger.

Feature D5. A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that the execution of the award determination by the award determination means is restricted in the first game and the second game, while the determination trigger can occur in either the first game or the second game.

According to the above configuration, although execution of the award judgment is restricted in the first game or the second game, a judgment trigger can occur. In other words, in a game in which a judgment trigger occurs in the first game or the second game, and then the award judgment is performed after that, not in the first game or the second game, it is possible to realize an innovative game in which the contribution of the result of the award judgment based on the judgment trigger being a miss to the ceiling differs depending on which game the judgment trigger occurs in.

Feature D6. Based on the fulfillment of a predetermined first transition condition, the transition is made to a first special game state in which the first game is played, and the first a first transition means for ending the special gaming state (a function for executing processing for starting and ending the first BB state in bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
A second special game state in which the second game is played based on the fulfillment of a predetermined second transition condition, which has a different advantage for the player from the first special game state. A second transition means (for starting and ending the second BB state in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101) functions) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, regarding the determination triggers that occur during the so-called bonus such as the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state, which have different advantages for the player, the determination trigger is determined depending on which bonus the determination trigger occurs. The degree of succession to the ceiling will be different if the judgment based on the judgment is incorrect. By doing this, in addition to the conventional gameplay such as which bonus allows you to enjoy profits, the weight of bonus types such as the degree of contribution to the ceiling differs depending on which bonus triggers the judgment. This makes it possible to increase the depth of the game, contributing to increased interest in the game.

Feature D7. A bet number setting means for setting the number of bets for a game (a function for executing processing for setting the number of bets by the main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the first game and the second game are games in which the same number of bets is set.

According to the above configuration, although the first game and the second game are games with the same number of bets, there is a case where a judgment opportunity occurs in the first game and a case where a judgment opportunity occurs in the second game. In this case, the degree of contribution to the ceiling when the judgment result is negative is different. With such a configuration, in a configuration in which the player can select which game will trigger a decision, the degree of contribution to the ceiling becomes more important, and the playability of feature D1 increases. Interest is increased.

Feature D8. Equipped with a bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game (a function for executing a process for setting the bet amount by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that the first game and the second game are games in which different bet amounts are set.

According to the above configuration, the number of bets in the first game and the second game are different, and in the case where the determination opportunity occurs in the first game and the case where the determination opportunity occurs in the second game, The configuration is such that the degree of contribution to the ceiling differs when the judgment result is negative. With such a configuration, it is possible to make good use of the association between the degree of contribution to the ceiling and the number of bets, which can be used to increase interest.

Feature D9. The second game is more advantageous to the player than the first game (the base is higher in the 2-bet game than in the 3-bet game, and the payout upper limit is higher in the 1st BB than in the 2nd BB),
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D8, characterized in that the award setting means can be set so that the benefit is more likely to be awarded when the specific information is used when the game that caused the judgment trigger was the first game, than when the specific information is used when the game that caused the judgment trigger was the second game.

According to the above configuration, the ceiling function is set so that the bonus is more likely to be awarded if the judgment trigger occurs during an unfavorable game. This makes it possible to realize different gameplay characteristics, such as making the current bonus judgment during the favorable second game, or during the first game in anticipation of not winning, thereby diversifying the game.

Feature D10. The second game has a higher gaming base than the first game, which is the average value of the deduction between the gaming value (number of bets) used in the game and the gaming value (number of payouts) given as a result of the game. The gaming machine according to feature D9, characterized in that the gaming machine is set to have a high price.

The above configuration is one embodiment of the specific configuration of feature D9. In other words, it is a configuration in which the difference in the degree of advantage between the first game and the second game is embodied by the game base. Furthermore, if a configuration is adopted in which the difference in the degree of advantage between the two games is set by such a game base, it becomes possible to expect the excellent effect of feature D9 with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature D11. A special notification means (a function for executing special notification processing by the display control device 81) capable of executing a special notification using a predetermined notification means to make the grant determination by the grant determination unit advantageous for the player. ,
According to any one of features D1 to D10, the grant setting means sets the ease with which the privilege is granted by setting the ease with which the special notification is executed by the special notification means. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, the award setting means does not vary the probability of the award determination by the award determination means, but rather executes a special notification to make the award determination more favorable, thereby realizing a ceiling function by making it easier to award the bonus. In this way, even if there are circumstances in which the probability of the award determination cannot be changed, it becomes possible to incorporate a ceiling function, which can greatly contribute to improving playability.

Feature D12. A high-grant state in which the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is likely to be the grant corresponding result, and a low-grant state in which the result is less likely to be the grant corresponding result than the high-grant state are set;
The gaming machine described in feature D11, characterized in that the special notification means is capable of executing a notification corresponding to the high award state or the low award state as the special notification.

The above configuration is one aspect of the specific configuration of the feature D11. That is, if the state in which the award determination is made is configured to have a high award state and a low award state, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the award determination based on the determination opportunity in the high award state. Therefore, by creating a configuration in which notifications corresponding to such high granting states and low granting states are executed as special notifications, it is possible to grasp which granting state the user is staying in and then generate a decision trigger. Through this, it is possible to receive a grant determination, and through this, it is possible to increase the possibility of winning the grant determination and being granted a benefit.

Feature D13. A specific state (advantageous zone) in which the award by the awarding means is permitted and a normal state (normal zone) in which the award by the awarding means is restricted are set as game states;
When the specific state ends and transitions to the normal state occurs, an initialization means (a function of executing initialization processing of advantageous zone information by the main control device 101) is provided for executing initialization processing of various information used in the specific state,
This gaming machine is
The present invention includes a first control device (main control device 101) having at least the award determination means and the initialization means, and a second control device (display control device 81) having at least the award setting means and the special notification means,
The gaming machine described in feature D11 or feature D12, wherein the second control device is equipped with a memory means (trigger through counter) capable of storing the specific information across the specific state.

According to the above configuration, the grant determination means makes a grant determination, and a specific state in which a benefit can be granted and a normal state in which the grant of the benefit is restricted are set, and when transitioning from the specific state to the normal state, Since the various information used in the specific state is initialized, the information in the specific state will not be carried over to the normal state, and assuming that the game will start from the normal state, Fairness among players at the start is ensured. On the other hand, in an attempt to ensure fairness in this way, there is a high possibility that the game will be terminated when the specific state ends, and there is a concern that the operating rate of the gaming machine will decrease. Therefore, although it is assumed that the initialization process is performed at the end of the specific state as described above, the specific information that the grant judgment used for setting the special notification as a ceiling function was not won is not included in the specific state. Since it is possible to store data across specific states, it is possible to associate each specific state with the special notification. Thereby, it becomes possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game across the specific state, and it is also possible to realize a ceiling that extends across the specific state.

Note that the invention described in features D1 to D13 above is based on the following: ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. There is a known configuration in which an internal lottery is held and rewards are given to players according to the results of the internal lottery.Specifically, with regard to slot machines, the slot machine starts when medals are bet as gaming media. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating, and if the stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating.Then, the reels stop. If the result corresponds to the result of an internal lottery, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Note that for each configuration of the features D1 to D13, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, and features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations I1 to I6 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A bet number operation means (credit input switch 56) for setting the number of bets for a game;
a bet number setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S205 and S206 by the main controller 101) for setting a bet number for a game based on the operation of the bet number operation means;
The game can be started by setting the number of bets by the number of bets setting means, and the game starting means starts the game based on the start operation by the player (the main controller 101 executes the processing of steps S207 to S211). function) and
A game ending means (a function for executing the processing of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) that ends the game based on the ending operation by the player;
When a predetermined determination opportunity (specific opportunity) occurs, an award determination means (a function for executing AT lottery processing by the main controller 101) capable of determining whether or not to award a benefit to a player;
If the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant corresponding result corresponding to grant of the benefit, the benefit grant means (the main controller 101 causes the main controller 101 to shift to the AT mode) which enables the grant of the benefit to the player. functions) and
Equipped with
A permissible state in which a first bet number (3 bets) is set by the bet number setting means and execution of the award determination by the award determination means is set; 2 The number of bets is set, and a restriction state is set in which execution of the grant judgment is restricted,
The bet number setting means is
a first number of bets setting means for setting the first number of bets when the number of bets operating means is operated;
a second number of bets setting means for setting the second number of bets when the number of bets operating means is operated;
A state in which the number of bets is set by the first number of bets setting means when the number of bets operating means is operated based on a predetermined switching trigger (a state in which 3 is input to the MAX bet counter) ) and a state in which the number of bets is set by the second number of bets setting means (a state in which 2 is input to the MAX bet counter). A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function of executing processing for switching a MAX bet counter.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the setting of the number of bets and the start operation by the player, the game is ended based on the end operation, and the bonus is given to the player when a predetermined determination opportunity occurs. In a gaming machine such as a so-called slot machine, where a bonus is awarded if the award determination result is a grant corresponding result that corresponds to the award of the bonus, Since a permissible state in which the execution of grant judgment is allowed and a restricted state in which execution of grant judgment is restricted, it is possible to allow multiple bets but limit games related to grant judgment. , it is possible to make it difficult for players to commit fraudulent acts that attempt to fraudulently obtain benefits by taking advantage of the difference in the number of bets.

Moreover, in the above configuration, when the bet number operation means is operated, there are cases in which the first number of bets that becomes the permissible state are set, and cases where the second number of bets that becomes the restricted state are set. When an opportunity arises, the number of bets to be set is switched. By doing this, for example, while the game is based on the first bet number in which the execution of the award judgment is normally allowed, for example, due to some circumstances, a situation has arisen where the execution of the award judgment has to be restricted while proceeding. In this case, it is possible to use the configuration related to the above-mentioned restriction state that defines the relationship between the number of bets and the award judgment to improve the gameplay, such as by forcing the player to play the game with the second number of bets. Become. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Feature E2. A separate bet number operating means (credit input switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) is provided separately from the bet number operation means and sets the number of bets for the game,
It is possible to set the second number of bets by operating the separate number of bets operation means in a state where the first number of bets is set by the first number of bets setting means, and the second number of bets is set by the second number of bets. The game according to feature E1, wherein the first number of bets can be set by operating the separate number of bets operation means in a state where the second number of bets is set by the setting means. Machine.

According to the above configuration, even in a situation where the number of bets set when the number of bets operating means is operated by the switching means is determined, the number of bets on the other side can be changed by operating the other number of bets operating means. It becomes possible to set. In other words, the player is free to decide which number of bets to set to play the game regardless of the situation, and the switching means is used to encourage the player to set the number of bets in accordance with the game content. By doing this, it is possible to change the number of bets and limit the award judgment without obliterating the real pleasure of slot machines, such as determining the number of bets by one's own will and starting and ending the game by one's own operations. It becomes possible to apply the presence or absence to the gameplay.

Feature E3. A transition determination means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that determines whether or not to transition the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the start operation;
If the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition compatible result that enables transition to the special gaming state, and the termination operation corresponds to the transition compatible result, the transition to the special gaming state is performed. , a special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) that ends the special gaming state when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the switching trigger is not caused by transition to the special gaming state.

The above configuration clarifies that the bet amount does not change in conjunction with the transition to a special gaming state, which is a so-called bonus state. This makes it possible to realize a novel gameplay that has never been seen before, in which the bet amount changes regardless of whether or not the special gaming state is transitioned, and the bet amount change may also result in a switch to a restricted state in which the awarding of special benefits is restricted.

Feature E4. A transition determination means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that determines whether or not to transition the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the start operation;
If the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition compatible result that enables transition to the special gaming state, and the termination operation corresponds to the transition compatible result, the transition to the special gaming state is performed. , a special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) that ends the special gaming state when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
Based on the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determining means being the transition compatible result, from the state where the second betting amount is set by the second betting amount setting means, the first betting amount setting device The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the trigger for switching to the state where the first bet amount is set occurs.

According to the above configuration, the restriction state is switched to the permissible state by winning the transition corresponding result that enables the transition to the special gaming state as a so-called bonus state. In other words, the configuration is such that the second number-of-bets restriction state is recommended before the transfer-compatible result is won, and the first bet-permitted state is recommended when the transfer-compatible result is won. By doing this, it is possible to realize novel gameplay features that have not been seen before, such as the number of bets automatically switching depending on the winning result of transition support, and the execution of award judgment being allowed. Become.

Feature E5. The gaming machine described in Feature E4, in which a transition to the special gaming state is possible in a game in which the second bet number is set, while a transition to the special gaming state is restricted in a game in which the first bet number is set.

According to the above configuration, when the game with the second bet number is switched to the game with the first bet number based on the winning of the transition result, the transition to the special game state due to the winning of the transition result does not occur. In other words, by switching the bet number, the game transitions to a game in which the winning of the transition result as a so-called bonus is carried over. By carrying over the winning of the transition result, when a situation where the winning of the transition result should be established is reached, there is an advantage that the winning of the transition result can be established earlier than a configuration in which the winning of the transition result is waited for from there. Here, for example, a configuration in which the winning of the transition result can be established with the first bet number and the winning of the transition result is carried over with the first bet number without switching the bet number is also conceivable. However, with such a configuration, when playing a game in which a grant judgment is made with the first bet number, it is necessary to force the player to play a game that always avoids the winning of the transition result before the situation where the winning of the transition result as described above should be established, which may hinder smooth game progress. In this regard, if the above configuration is used, the transition result winning will not be established after switching to the first bet number, making it possible to enjoy the benefits of the transition result winning at the desired timing while realizing smooth game progress.

Feature E6. A transition determination means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that determines whether or not to transition the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the start operation;
If the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition compatible result that enables transition to the special gaming state, and the termination operation corresponds to the transition compatible result, the transition to the special gaming state is performed. , a special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) that ends the special gaming state when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein in the special game state, execution of award determination by the award determination means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, when a transition to a special gaming state as a so-called bonus state occurs, the execution of the award judgment is restricted. In other words, the award judgment is performed in a situation where the first bet number is the first and the special gaming state is not in the special gaming state. In this way, it is possible to realize a gameplay that allows the player to play while expecting the award judgment, which is different from the conventional gameplay that tends to wait for the special gaming state, without increasing the superiority of the special gaming state as a so-called bonus state too much. In addition, by using the above configuration, for example, if a situation does not want to make a award judgment, it is possible to limit the execution of the award judgment not only by switching from the first bet number to the second bet number, but also by causing a transition to the special gaming state. Therefore, the gameplay is enhanced by utilizing the presence or absence of restrictions on the award judgment, which can also be useful in increasing the interest of the game.

Feature E7. The gaming machine described in Feature E6 is characterized in that it is provided with a means for enabling the second bet setting means to set the second bet number when the bet number operation means is operated based on the end of the special game state.

According to the above configuration, even after the special gaming state as a so-called bonus state ends, the restricted state is set. By doing this, the special game state and the state after the end of the special game state become a state in which collective award determination is restricted. Therefore, for example, it is possible to create a game experience by associating the state in which the award judgment is restricted with the number of bets or special game state, such as by performing a performance using the grouped state, which can be used to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Feature E8. Based on the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determining means being the transition compatible result, from the state where the second betting amount is set by the second betting amount setting means, the first betting amount setting device The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the trigger for switching to the state in which the first bet amount is set occurs.

According to the above configuration, the special gaming state and the subsequent state in which grant determination is restricted are terminated by the winning of the transition corresponding result that allows transition to the special gaming state. By doing this, after winning as a result of transition support and switching to a special game state and switching to a game where award determination is restricted, it is possible to switch to a game where transition determination is allowed as soon as the special game state ends. The configuration is such that the game is switched to a game for which the award judgment is allowed after the player has won as a result of the transition and is able to cause the transition to the special gaming state, and then the transition to the special gaming state is caused. It becomes possible to maintain the situation. As a result, if you are trying to cause a transition to a special gaming state in order to limit the grant judgment, it will be possible to cause the transition to the special gaming state earlier without waiting for the transition response result to be won. By causing a transition to a special gaming state, it is possible to suitably realize a gaming experience that avoids award determination.

Feature E9. A special performance execution means (a function for executing processing for performing a bonus state performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing a special performance corresponding to the special game state using a predetermined performance means,
The special performance execution means is capable of executing the special performance after the end of the special game state until the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means becomes the transition corresponding result, as described in feature E8. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of feature E8, by continuing the special performance, the player can be made to comfortably accept that the restricted state continues even after the special game state. This makes it possible to more appropriately expect the effect of feature E8.

The invention described in the features E1 to E9 above was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that for each configuration of the features E1 to E9, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, and features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations I1 to I6 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A specific information storage means (a lottery information storage area 106g in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific selection means (a function of executing an AT mode transition selection by the main control device 101) capable of performing a specific selection as to whether or not a specific event (AT mode transition) is to occur by using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the selection result by the selection means;
A specific execution means (a function of executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode) for causing the specific event based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (a win for transition to the AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
Equipped with
a first specific state (first mode) and a second specific state (second mode) are set in which the corresponding information as the specific information is different from the special result, and the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery is associated with the special result such that the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery is the specific result;
A gaming machine characterized in that the state transition between the first specific state and the second specific state is set to occur in either an allowed game (e.g., a 3-bet game) in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is permitted, or a restricted game (e.g., a 2-bet game) in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting stops, In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means are stored. Since a specific lottery is performed to determine whether or not a specific event will occur using the specific information stored in the means, it is no longer possible to simply match the lottery results of the lottery means with the results of stopping the orbiting body. The game experience is completely different from that of a slot machine.

Furthermore, since the first specific state and the second specific state are provided so that the corresponding information associated with the special result as the lottery result of the game is different so that the lottery result of the specific lottery is a specific result that corresponds to causing a specific event, even when the specific lottery is performed using the same special result and the same specific information, an event may occur in which a win is obtained in the first specific state but not in the second specific state. In this way, the gaming machine can determine whether it is better to take the specific lottery in the first specific state or the second specific state, even if the same special result is obtained, based on the specific information obtained in advance.

In addition, in the above configuration, allowable play in which the execution of a specific lottery is permitted and allowable play in which it is restricted are set, and the state transition between the first specific state and the second specific state is configured to occur in either allowable play or restricted play, so it is possible to win the specific lottery by waiting until the specific information acquired in advance transitions to a specific state in which it is corresponding information and then providing that specific information to the specific lottery, and conversely, it is also possible to not win the specific lottery by waiting until the specific information acquired in advance transitions to a specific state in which it is not corresponding information and then providing that specific information to the specific lottery. In this way, it is possible to dramatically improve the playability by utilizing the specific information acquired in advance and the lottery results of the game.

In addition, in the above configuration, "the specific lottery means is configured to collect predetermined specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means in a predetermined game and stored in the specific information storage means, and a lottery after the predetermined game." The specific lottery result can be executed using the lottery result by the lottery means in a specific game, which is a game of It can be made clearer that a specific lottery may be held in relation to game results.

The "specific information storage means capable of storing the specific information" may be expressed as "specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information" or as "specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information, which is a predetermined plurality." Such changes in expression may also be applied to other features and other groups of features.

Feature F2. Feature F1 is characterized in that the game is provided with a switching operation means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) capable of performing switching between the allowed game and the restricted game based on a player's operation. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible for the player himself to select and switch between the allowed game and the restricted game. By doing so, it becomes possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the player decides whether or not to consume the specific information that has been acquired in advance in relation to the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F3. A bet number operation means (credit input switch 56) for setting the number of bets for a game;
a bet number setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S205 and S206 by the main controller 101) for setting a bet number for a game based on the operation of the bet number operation means;
Equipped with
A game in which a first number of bets (3 bets) is set by the number of bets setting means is included in the allowed games, and a game in which a second number of bets different from the first number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means. The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein: is included in the restricted game.

The above configuration is one aspect of the specific configuration of feature F2. In particular, as mentioned above, a new configuration for switching operation is added by creating a configuration that allows switching between allowed games and restricted games by setting the number of bets for a so-called slot machine. Therefore, it is possible to effectively utilize the existing configuration to achieve the effect of feature F2.

Feature F4. Specific notification means (suspension display processing by the display control device 81) that allows a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) to perform specific notification (pending display) regarding the specific information stored in the specific information storage device The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the above functions.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to know the specific information acquired in advance based on the specific notification, and therefore it is possible to play while predicting whether the specific information is in a specific state that will become the corresponding information when it is provided to the specific lottery. This makes it possible to increase attention to the switching between restricted play and permitted play, i.e., whether or not the specific information is consumed, and improves the enjoyment of the game.

Feature F5. The specific information is updated based on the specific information being acquired by the specific information acquiring means, and the specific information stored by the specific information storage means is used for the specific lottery by the specific lottery means. The gaming machine according to feature F4, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with an updating means (a function of executing processing for a pending shift by the display control device 81) that is capable of updating the specific notification based on the following information.

According to the above configuration, by checking whether or not the specific notification has been updated, it is possible to ascertain whether or not specific information has been consumed, and whether it is a restricted game or a permitted game can be determined. In this way, it is possible to make it easier to play a game in which the corresponding information is predicted and understood from the content of the specific information grasped from the specific notification, and a specific state in which the specific information is provided to the specific lottery is predicted. becomes possible.

Feature F6. A special notification means that can execute a special notification corresponding to the first specific state or the second specific state by a predetermined notification means (a first mode presentation or a second mode presentation by the display control device 81, The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing processing for performing a mode predictive performance or a second mode predictive performance.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to know which specific state is in question based on the special notification. In this way, it becomes easier to predict the specific state when the specific information acquired in advance is provided to a specific lottery.

Feature F7. The gaming machine described in Feature F6, characterized in that the special notification means includes a first special notification means (a function of executing processing for the display control device 81 to perform a first mode presentation or a second mode presentation) capable of executing, as the special notification, a notification suggesting a specific state of the game in which the special notification is executed.

According to the above configuration, whether the current game is in the first specific state or the second specific state is suggested by the special notification. By doing this, when a specific lottery is held regarding specific information, it becomes possible to predict and understand from the specific state whether or not the specific lottery will be a winner. In configurations where there is regularity in the transition, the subsequent transition to a specific state is predicted from the current type of specific state, and the content of a specific lottery for specific information that has been obtained in advance based on the prediction. It also becomes possible to predict and understand. By doing so, the gameplay using the special notification can be dramatically improved.

Feature F8. The special notification means is a second special notification unit (in a first mode by the display control device 81) that can execute a notification indicating a specific state of a game a predetermined number of times after the game in which the special notification is executed as the special notification. The gaming machine according to feature F6 or feature F7, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a process for performing a predictive performance or a second mode predictive performance.

According to the above configuration, it is suggested by the special notification whether the game after the current game is in the first specific state or the second specific state. By doing so, it is possible to know in advance the specific state in the case where a specific lottery is held based on the specific information that has been acquired in advance, and it is also possible to predict and understand the content of the specific lottery. By doing so, the gameplay using the special notification can be dramatically improved.

Feature F9. The specific information storage means is configured to be able to store a specific number of the specific information, which is a plurality of numbers,
The gaming machine according to feature F8, wherein the predetermined number is smaller than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, the special notification by the second special notification means as a notification suggesting a future specific state is a notification corresponding to a specific state after a number of plays that is less than the upper limit number of specific information acquired and stored in advance. In this way, it is possible to appropriately play a game in which the specific state is understood in relation to the specific information acquired in advance, and the content of the specific lottery is predicted and understood based on the balance between whether or not the specific information is consumed depending on whether or not it is a limited play.

Feature F10. The special notification means is
A first special notification means (a function for executing a process for performing a first mode presentation or a second mode presentation by the display control device 81) capable of executing a notification suggesting a specific state of the game in which the special notification is executed as the special notification;
The special notification means includes a second special notification means (a function for executing a process for performing a first mode prediction presentation or a second mode prediction presentation by the display control device 81) capable of executing a notification suggesting a specific state of a game a predetermined number of times after the game in which the special notification is executed as the special notification;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features F6 to F9, characterized in that the special notification by the second special notification means is set to have a higher reliability as a notification corresponding to the specific state than the special notification by the first special notification means.

The above configuration makes it easier to grasp the current specific state than the future specific state. This makes it possible to determine the transition of the specific state earlier, which is preferable for switching between restricted play and permitted play.

In addition, "the reliability of the notification is high because it corresponds to the specific state" means, for example, "there is a high probability that the notification corresponds to the specific state" or "the content indicated by the special notification corresponds to the specific state". It may also be expressed as, ``This is likely to result in a corresponding notification.'' Further, the "first special notification means" and the "second special notification means" are configured to execute the "special notification" through a "predetermined lottery", and the "predetermined lottery by the first special notification means" It may also be configured such that the probability of winning a predetermined lottery by the second special notification means is higher than the probability of winning a lottery. In this case, the "first special notification means" executes the "special notification" through a "prescribed lottery," while the "second special notification means" executes the "special notification" without going through the "prescribed lottery." It may also be configured to execute "Notification".

Feature F11. The gaming machine described in any one of Features F6 to F10, characterized in that the special notification means is configured to make it easier to execute the special notification when the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a result other than the specific result.

According to the above configuration, a special notification is executed as compensation for the fact that the result of the specific lottery is not a specific result and a specific event does not occur. As a result, it becomes easier to play a game in which the type of specific state is identified. Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively follow up on the decrease in the player's motivation to play when a specific result is not obtained.

Feature F12: A setting value capable of causing a change in the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the gaming medium is set in multiple stages, and a setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided to set one of the multiple setting values;
A gaming machine described in any one of features F6 to F10, characterized in that the execution rate of the special notification by the special notification means differs between when a first setting value is set by the setting means and when a second setting value different from the first setting value is set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, a setting difference is provided in the execution rate of special notification. By doing so, it is possible to cause changes in the increase/decrease rate and manner of increase/decrease of game media by using special notifications corresponding to the type of specific state, contributing to the diversification of games.

Feature F13. A gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F12, characterized in that the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification during the limited play.

According to the above configuration, in a restricted game, a special notification corresponding to the type of specific state is issued in a situation where the specific information is not consumed. In this way, for example, if restricted play is switched to permissible play and the specific information is provided to a specific lottery, it is possible to predict, based on the regularity of the transition of the specific state, that the specific information acquired in advance will be the corresponding information for the specific state when it is provided to the specific lottery, and it is possible to attract the player's attention, including whether or not there is a switch between restricted play and permissible play.

Feature F14. A gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F13, characterized in that the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification during the permitted play.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where specific information is consumed during permissible play, a special notification corresponding to the type of specific state is issued. In this way, for example, if permissible play is switched to restricted play and the specific information is not consumed, it becomes possible to hold off on consumption until the specific information acquired in advance becomes information corresponding to the specific state when it is provided to a specific lottery, making it possible to attract the player's attention, including whether or not there is a switch between restricted play and permissible play.

Feature F15. The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F14, wherein the special notification means is easier to execute the special notification for the restricted game than for the permitted game.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the interest of limited play in which the execution of a specific lottery is restricted by utilizing the execution rate of the special notification. In particular, since the execution of a special lottery is restricted in limited play, it is thought that players who want to receive a special lottery would prefer to play permissible play rather than limited play. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the special notification reminds the player of the importance of waiting to consume the specific information acquired in advance in limited play until it corresponds to a specific state, and it is possible to suitably prevent the player from losing patience and switching to permissible play before the desired specific state is reached, even though he is playing limited play.

The invention described in the above features F1 to F15 has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus according to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The background technology is "Here, in the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that for each configuration of the features F1 to F15, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, and features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations I1 to I6 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A specific information storage means (a lottery information storage area 106g in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific selection means (a function of executing an AT mode transition selection by the main control device 101) capable of performing a specific selection as to whether or not a specific event (AT mode transition) is to occur by using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the selection result by the selection means;
A specific execution means (a function of executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode) for causing the specific event based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (a win for transition to the AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
Equipped with
The lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, and the corresponding information as the specific information that corresponds to the special result such that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery becomes the specific result varies depending on the number of games (number of games in the advantageous zone AG) from a predetermined starting trigger that is determined in advance,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, as games to be played from the specified starting trigger, it is possible to play an allowed game (e.g., a 3-bet game) in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is permitted, and a restricted game (e.g., a 2-bet game) in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means draws a game and the rotation of the circling body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circling body stops, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, a specific lottery is performed to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, using the lottery result by the lottery means and specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means and stored in the specific information storage means. This provides a completely different gameplay from conventional slot machines, which simply match the lottery result by the lottery means with the stopping result of the circling body.

Moreover, for the special result as the lottery result of the game, the correspondence information that is associated with the specific result corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery causes a specific event is provided for the number of games played from the predetermined starting trigger. Even if a special lottery is conducted using the same special result and the same specific information, there may or may not be a winning result depending on the number of games played from the predetermined starting trigger. You will get it.

In addition, in the above configuration, as a game that can be executed from a predetermined starting opportunity, a permissible state in which the execution of a specific lottery is permitted and a permissible state in which it is restricted are set, and the specific information acquired in advance is used as the corresponding information. By waiting until the number of games is reached and then providing the specific information to the specific lottery, it is possible to win the specific lottery, or conversely, the number of games is such that the specific information acquired in advance does not become the corresponding information. By waiting until then and providing the specific information to the specific lottery, it is also possible to prevent the person from winning the specific lottery. By doing so, it becomes possible to dramatically improve the gameplay using the specific information obtained in advance and the lottery results of the game.

Feature G2. Irrespective of the number of games played from the predetermined starting opportunity, the above-mentioned number of games associated with the special result for each number of games is set so that the probability that the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means will be the specified result is common. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that correspondence information is set.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the corresponding information is set according to the number of plays from a specified start trigger, the corresponding information is set so that the winning probability of the specific lottery does not change regardless of the number of plays. If the winning probability of the specific lottery were to be made different, in a configuration in which limited play and allowed play are provided, an event may occur in which allowed play should be set for a specified number of plays regardless of the corresponding information. In this regard, by using the above configuration, it is possible to enjoy switching between limited play and allowed play purely in relation to the specific information obtained in advance.

Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result is set to be the same regardless of the number of games played from the predetermined starting opportunity. .

According to the above configuration, in the configuration where the correspondence information is set according to the number of games played from a predetermined starting opportunity, the probability of a special result in each game itself is set to be the same regardless of the number of games played. By doing this, the event that the winning rate of a specific lottery does not change due to the difference in the probability of a special result will not occur, so it is possible to determine whether restricted gaming is allowed based on the relationship with specific information that has been obtained in advance. You can enjoy switching between games.

Feature G4. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and a second operation result that may be awarded a benefit different from the first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode (for example, a push order bell), is set;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification execution means (a function of executing a push order notification process by the main control device 101) is provided that can execute a mode notification regarding an operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
an advantageous state in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is executable, and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is not executable,
The predetermined start trigger occurs based on a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state,
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the specific event is an event that causes the mode notification execution means to perform the mode notification.

According to the above configuration, when a winning result is obtained, which may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, a notification of the mode of the stop operation may be made by a predetermined notification means, so that it is possible to give different benefits to the player by making the player perform an operation according to the mode notification. Based on this type of gameplay, the specific information that is won in the specific lottery that generates a specific event, such as making the mode notification, is set to be different depending on the number of plays after the transition to an advantageous state in which the mode notification is possible, so it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the occurrence of a mode notification is predicted in advance based on the relationship between the specific information acquired in advance and the number of plays. Moreover, since it is possible to play games in which the specific information acquired in advance is consumed and games in which it is not consumed, the configuration is such that the occurrence of the predicted mode notification changes depending on the games played by the player thereafter. In this way, it is possible to dramatically improve the fun of the gameplay that utilizes the mode notification.

Feature G5. Advantageous state notification means (a section indicator) that starts advantageous state notification based on transition to the advantageous state and satisfaction of a predetermined notification condition, and ends the advantageous state notification when the advantageous state ends. Equipped with 8 display segments N8),
The gaming machine according to feature G4, wherein the gaming machine is set so that the predetermined notification condition may not be satisfied when the predetermined starting opportunity occurs.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of feature G4, which is premised on gameplay based on mode notification, an advantageous state notification is performed during an advantageous state, and the advantageous state notification is set to end when the advantageous state ends, so that by checking the advantageous state notification, the player can clearly understand whether the advantageous state will continue (whether it will end). This makes it possible to ensure fairness between players who can identify whether the advantageous state will continue from other information and players who cannot, improving the soundness of the game. In addition, when a transition to an advantageous state occurs, there are cases in which an advantageous state notification is started and cases in which it is not started, and more specifically, the start of the advantageous state notification is put on hold until a predetermined notification condition is met. In this way, in a gameplay that aims for an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the transition to the advantageous state from being obvious, improving the soundness of the game while not impairing the gameplay. And by applying such a configuration to the present invention, in which the corresponding information that will win a specific lottery is set to be different depending on the number of plays after the transition to the advantageous state occurs, it becomes difficult to know the number of plays after the transition to the advantageous state occurs, and as a result, it is possible to increase the difficulty of predicting the corresponding information. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game by utilizing the relationship between specific information acquired in advance and whether or not that specific information is consumed.

Feature G6: The device is provided with a special notification means (a function of executing a special notification process or a reserved display process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a special notification (a first mode effect, a second mode effect, a first mode prediction effect, a second mode prediction effect, and a reserved display) showing the relationship between the number of plays and the corresponding information by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that the probability of the special notification by the special notification means is set to change depending on the number of plays after the specified start trigger occurs.

According to the above configuration, the correspondence information associated with the special result differs depending on the number of games played, and furthermore, in the gameplay in which it is possible to execute games that differ depending on whether or not specific information is consumed, the number of games played and the correspondence information are different. Since a special notification indicating the relationship may be given, it is also possible for the player to decide whether or not to consume specific information based on the special notification, thereby improving the probability of winning a specific lottery. Since the execution probability of the special notification is set to change depending on the number of games played from a predetermined starting opportunity, the probability of winning a specific lottery can be changed using the special notification. . This eliminates the need to change the correspondence information or the probability of a special result, etc., so the configuration does not become complicated, and the situation where it is not possible to change the correspondence information or the probability of a special result, etc. is eliminated. Even with certain gaming machines, the probability of winning a specific lottery can be changed.

Feature G7. a game number information storage means (various table storage area 182a by display control device 81) that stores a plurality of game number information (mode transition tables) that sets the relationship between the number of games and the corresponding information;
Selection means capable of executing a selection process of selecting one piece of game number information from the game number information stored in the game number information storage means (a function of executing a process for setting a mode transition table by the display control device 81) )and,
Equipped with
The specific lottery means is configured to grasp the corresponding information according to the number of games from the number of games information selected by the selection means and execute the specific lottery,
The selection means is configured to execute the selection process based on the number of games played after executing the selection process reaches a predetermined specific number of games (100 games). The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G6.

According to the above configuration, each time the number of plays reaches a specific number of plays, the number of plays information is updated, which defines the relationship between the number of plays and the corresponding information. This prevents the game from becoming monotonous by utilizing the relationship between the number of plays and the corresponding information, and even if the player selects number of plays information that is not preferable, there is at least a possibility that the unpreferred number of plays information will be updated to other number of plays information by playing the specific number of plays. Conversely, even if the player selects number of plays information that is preferable for the player, the preferable specific number of plays information can be updated by playing the specific number of plays, which makes it possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature G8. The gaming machine according to feature G7, characterized in that in the permissible game, execution of the selection process by the selection means is permitted, while in the restricted game, execution of the selection process by the selection means is restricted. .

According to the above configuration, not only the specific lottery but also the update of the number of games information that defines the specific information (corresponding information) used in the specific lottery is restricted in the limited game. By doing so, it is possible to prevent wasteful processing such as only updating the game number information even though a specific lottery is not performed.

Feature G9. The gaming machine according to feature G8, wherein the selection process by the selection means is set to be executed in one game before the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is performed.

The above configuration makes it difficult to perform actions such as avoiding the update of the number of plays information by limiting play, and then holding a specific lottery using the number of plays information before the update as an allowable play when the desired number of plays is reached.

Feature G10. Special notification means capable of executing special notification (first mode predicted performance, second mode predicted performance, and hold display) indicating the relationship between the number of games and the corresponding information on a predetermined notification unit (auxiliary display section 65). (a function for executing special notification processing and hold display processing by the display control device 81),
means capable of restricting execution of the special notification after the number of games played after the selection process reaches the specific number of games, at least until the selection process is executed after the number of games reaches the specific number of games; The gaming machine according to any one of features G7 to G9.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which the corresponding information associated with a special result differs depending on the number of plays, and further in which it is possible to play games with or without the consumption of specific information, a special notification may be made indicating the relationship between the number of plays and the corresponding information, so that the player can decide whether or not to consume specific information based on the special notification, thereby improving the probability of winning a specific lottery. Furthermore, even if the number of plays information is updated thereafter, the special notification is set not to be executed based on the information before the update, so that an event does not occur in which the executed special notification does not match the actual content. This makes it possible to avoid a decrease in motivation to play due to a decrease in the credibility of the special notification.

In addition, the invention described in the above features G1 to G10 is based on the fact that ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. There is a known configuration in which an internal lottery is held and rewards are given to players according to the results of the internal lottery.Specifically, with regard to slot machines, the slot machine starts when medals are bet as gaming media. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating, and if the stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating.Then, the reels stop. If the result corresponds to the result of an internal lottery, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Note that for each configuration of the features G1 to G10, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features H1 to H8, and features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations I1 to I6 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature H Group>
Feature H1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106g in the main control device 101) capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific selection means (a function of executing an AT mode transition selection by the main control device 101) capable of performing a specific selection as to whether or not a specific event (AT mode transition) is to occur by using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the selection result by the selection means;
A specific execution means (a function of executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode) for causing the specific event based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (a win for transition to the AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
Equipped with
A limited game (e.g., a two-bet game) is set in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is limited,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the acquisition condition is met, the specific information acquisition means acquires the specific information if the specified number of the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means, but does not acquire the specific information if the specified number of the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting stops, In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means are stored. Since a specific lottery is performed to determine whether or not a specific event will occur using the specific information stored in the means, it is no longer possible to simply match the lottery results of the lottery means with the results of stopping the orbiting body. The game experience is completely different from that of a slot machine.

The above configuration is based on the premise that there may be cases where a limited game in which a specific lottery is limited is played, and the specific information acquisition means is configured to acquire specific information when an acquisition condition is met if a predetermined number of specific information, which is the upper limit, is not stored in the specific information storage means, but not to acquire specific information when a predetermined number of specific information, which is the upper limit, is stored. Therefore, even in a situation where a specific lottery is not played and specific information is not consumed, it is possible to prevent, with a relatively simple configuration, the inconvenience of acquiring specific information in excess of the upper limit or of specific information being overwritten.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to Feature H1, characterized in that the specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring the specific information when the acquisition condition is met in the limited play.

As in the above configuration, by making it possible to acquire specific information even though the specific information is not consumed in the restricted state, it is possible to only acquire specific information in a situation where the specific information has not been stored to a predetermined number. This makes it possible to store specific information with a relatively simple configuration, for example, when the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is erased.

Feature H3. Equipped with a bet amount setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) for setting the bet amount for the game;
The gaming machine described in feature H2 is characterized in that in a game that is started after a first bet number (3 bets) is set by the bet number setting means, the specific lottery can be conducted by the specific lottery means, while in a game that is started after a second bet number (2 bets) different from the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the game becomes a restricted game in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, if you want to only acquire specific information without consuming it, you only need to set the number of bets to the second number of bets instead of the first number of bets; This makes it possible to quickly store up to a predetermined number of specific information with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature H4. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (first BB, second BB), and the game state is changed to normal based on the fact that the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the valid position. A special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) for transitioning from a gaming state to a special gaming state and terminating the special gaming state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined ending condition,
In the game in the normal game state, the specific lottery may be performed by the specific lottery means, while in the game in the special game state, the limited game is such that execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted. The gaming machine according to feature H2 or feature H3.

According to the above configuration, if one wishes to acquire specific information without consuming it, it is necessary to transition the game state to a special game state, which is a so-called bonus state. Generally, when a transition to the special game state occurs, for example, information to that effect is output to the hall computer or data display of the game hall, or a bonus state presentation is performed, so it is considered that the manager of the game hall can easily grasp that the transition to the special game state has occurred. In this way, for example, if undesirable specific information is stored and the specific information is erased by some operation, and then a transition to the special game state occurs in an attempt to accumulate more specific information, the manager of the game hall can easily identify that this action is taking place. This makes it difficult to illegally acquire specific information.

Feature H5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H2 to H4, characterized in that when a predetermined operation (operation of the reset switch 72) is performed, the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is erased.

According to the above configuration, the specific information stored in the specific information storage means may be erased when a specific operation is performed. By applying the configuration of feature H2 to such a gaming machine, it becomes possible to store the specific information after the information is erased and then use it for normal gaming.

In addition, by defining the "prescribed operation" as "the operation of an operating means provided in a position that becomes operable when a prescribed unlocking operation is performed," it will be made clear that players will not be able to freely erase specific information.

Feature H6. As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first operation result is won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means wins a prize in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A mode result (for example, a push order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a profit different from the first operation result by operating in an operation mode is set;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification execution means (main) that can perform mode notification regarding the operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means. (a function of executing press order notification processing by the control device 101),
An advantageous state in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means can be executed, and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means cannot be executed, are set;
Means capable of erasing the specific information stored in the specific information storage means based on the end of the advantageous state (a function for executing initialization processing of advantageous section information by the main controller 101) ) The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H5.

According to the above configuration, when the winning result may vary depending on the operating manner of the stop operation means, the manner of the stop operation may be notified by the predetermined informing means, so that the manner of the stop operation may be notified by the predetermined informing means. By having the player perform the operations, it becomes possible to award different benefits to the player. On the premise of such gameplay, by configuring the specific information stored in the specific information storage means to be deleted when the advantageous condition in which mode notification is possible ends, it is possible to erase the specific information stored in the specific information storage means. Since the specified information is not carried over across advantageous states, the independence of each advantageous state is ensured. By applying the configuration of feature H2 to such gaming machines, it becomes possible to re-acquire specific information in a normal state where execution of a specific lottery may be restricted, and the system shifts to an advantageous state again. When doing so, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as not being able to participate in a specific lottery because specific information is not accumulated.

Feature H7. The gaming machine described in Feature H6, characterized in that the game in the normal state is included in a restricted game in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, it is made clear that the specific information is not consumed in the normal state, but only acquired.

Feature H8. Lottery time acquisition means for acquiring the specific information to be used in the current specific lottery from among the specific information stored in the specific information storage means based on the specific lottery being held by the specific lottery means; (Function to execute the process of shifting the AT counter to the execution area AE in the random number shift process by the main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, wherein the acquisition condition is established after the specific information is acquired by the lottery acquisition means.

According to the above configuration, in each game, the specific information is consumed by being provided to a specific lottery, creating space in the specific information storage means, and then the specific information is acquired. This basically means that the upper limit number of specific information is stored in the specific information storage means at the end of each game, and it is also clarified that if the specific information is not consumed in a limited game, the specific information is not acquired.

The invention described in the above features H1 to H8 was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that for each configuration of the features H1 to H8, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, and features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations I1 to I6 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A game start means (a function for executing the processing of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101) that starts the game based on a start operation by the player;
A game ending means (a function for executing the processing of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) that ends the game based on the ending operation by the player;
a lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the start operation;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the termination operation is an operation corresponding to the predetermined result, a benefit granting means (payout determination by the main controller 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result. functions) and
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific lottery means (AT lottery processing by the main controller 101) that can execute a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event advantageous to the player (transition to AT mode) will occur using the lottery result by the lottery means. ) and
If the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result that corresponds to causing the specific event, the specific event means that causes the specific event (which causes the main controller 101 to shift to the AT mode) (a function that executes processing for
In a gaming machine equipped with
The specific lottery means executes the specific lottery using the lottery result obtained by the lottery means, and predetermined first information (mode transition table, AT counter) and second information (number of advantageous zone games AG). The configuration is
A first information updating means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to a lottery mode by the main controller 101 and a process for random number shift) that updates the first information during a game;
a second information updating means (a function of executing a second section display process by the main controller 101) that updates the second information during a game;
Equipped with
A first game (3-bet game) in which updating of the first information by the first information updating means is permitted and a second game (2-bet game) in which updating of the first information is restricted is defined. and
A gaming machine characterized in that updating of the second information by the second information updating means is permitted in both the first game and the second game.

According to the above configuration, in gaming machines such as so-called slot machines, where a game is started based on a start operation by the player and a lottery is held for that game, the game is ended based on an end operation, and a bonus is awarded if the end operation corresponds to the lottery result, a specific lottery may be held using the lottery result of the game to determine whether or not a specific event advantageous to the player will occur, and if the specific lottery is won, a specific event will occur, so that interest in the game is increased by drawing attention not only to the lottery results for each game but also to the lottery results for the specific lottery.

In this case, the specific lottery means for performing the specific lottery is configured to perform the specific lottery using not only the lottery results of each game but also the first information and the second information. The first information is allowed to be updated in the first game and restricted to be updated in the second game, whereas the second information is updated in both the first game and the second game. Therefore, when the first game is being played, the specific lottery is always performed using the updated first information and second information, whereas when the second game is being played, the updated first information is used, but the unupdated second information is used. In this way, for example, if the second information is preferable to the player, it is possible to play while avoiding the second information being updated in the second game, and if the second information is not preferable to the player, it is also possible to update the second information in the first game. In other words, compared to when both the first information and the second information are updated every time a game is played, by making it possible to restrict or allow the update of one of the information, the difficulty of finding a combination of the two information that is favorable to the player is dramatically reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability of the game using a specific lottery.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the player can select which of the first game and the second game to play.

According to the above configuration, the player can freely select between the first game in which the first information is updated and the second game in which the first information is not updated. The active participation of the players is encouraged, and the interest in the game is improved.

Feature I3. It is characterized by comprising a special notification means (a function for executing special notification processing and pending display processing by the display control device 81) that can execute special notification corresponding to the first information using a predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2.

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the first information through the special notification, and can also determine whether the first game or the second game is appropriate based on the first information. Therefore, it is possible to improve the entertainment value of the above game by applying the relationship between the first information and the second information or the relationship between the first game and the second game to a specific lottery.

Feature I4. A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that in the first game, execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is permitted, while in the second game, execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, in order to receive the specific lottery, it is necessary to play at least the first game. In this case, in the second game, the combination of the first information and the second information is preferable for the player, which is different from the case where the update of the first information side is restricted and only the second information side is updated. In other words, when the second game is being played, there is a high possibility that the combination of the first information and the second information is not yet favorable to the player. . Therefore, as in the above configuration, in the second game, by configuring the specific lottery itself to be restricted, unnecessary execution of the specific lottery can be avoided. In a configuration where new primary information and secondary information are required by being provided to This prevents the inconvenience of using the first information and second information before optimization and requiring optimization again.

Feature I5. The first information updating means updates the information according to a predetermined first rule (the mode corresponding to the mode transition table is switched each time a game is played, and the AT counter is shifted) each time a game is played. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, characterized in that the first information is updated.

According to the above configuration, if the player understands the first rule, it is possible to predict the updated first information before updating the first information. By doing this, even in a situation where updating of the first information is restricted in the second game, it is possible to predict the first information that will be updated when the first game is played.

Feature I6. The specific lottery means includes specific information derived from the relationship between the first information and the second information (corresponding to a first mode and a second mode in the first embodiment, and a lottery mode in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, wherein the specific lottery is executed using a winning value of an AT counter) and a lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, in the specific lottery, the specific information derived from the relationship between the first information and the second information is used instead of simply using the first information and the second information, so that the second information side is always The significance of being updated becomes clearer.

The invention described in the above features I1 to I6 was made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that for each configuration of the features I1 to I6, features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, and features It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configurations of any one of H1 to H8 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Note that, to each of the configurations of Feature Group A to Feature Group I described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other Feature Groups A to I individually, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner and then displays the series of symbols in a final stopped state, in which the variation of the symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the variation of the symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern sequence, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operating means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operating means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... Slot machine as a gaming machine, 32... Reel as a rotating body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker forming an auxiliary performance section, 65 ... Auxiliary display part constituting an auxiliary production part, 68... Instruction monitor, N8... Eighth display segment as a section indicator, 81... Display control device as a sub control board, 101... Main control device as a main control board , 102... A CPU that constitutes various control means such as a lottery means and a main control means.

Claims (1)

A plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of patterns applied thereto in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated;
A stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A means for executing a specific determination that allows a specific event advantageous to a player to occur when a determination trigger occurs;
a means for enabling the specific event to occur when a result of the specific determination is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event;
a determination means capable of executing a predetermined calculation process on the specific numerical information when the result of the determination is not the specific result;
A means for changing the likelihood of the specific event occurring when the specific numerical information becomes special numerical information;
a means for executing a first calculation process on the specific numerical information when the game in which the predetermined judgment trigger occurs is a first game, and executing a second calculation process different from the first calculation process on the specific numerical information when the game in which the predetermined judgment trigger occurs is a second game different from the first game, or not executing the calculation process when the game in which the predetermined judgment trigger occurs is the second game;
Equipped with
The device is configured so that a player can understand that the specific judgment is being made ,
a first result which allows a prize to be won when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, and a second result which allows a prize to be won when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode are set as lottery results by the lottery means;
a means for executing notification of an operation mode of the stop operation means,
A specific state in which the mode notification can be executed is provided as a gaming state,
A means for starting the specific state when a start condition is satisfied;
A means for terminating the specific state when a termination condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The predetermined determination trigger occurs in the specific state,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the termination condition is met, the specific state can be terminated without initializing the specific numerical information.

Images